WO2020143730A1 - Communication method and communication apparatus - Google Patents

Communication method and communication apparatus Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2020143730A1
WO2020143730A1 PCT/CN2020/071273 CN2020071273W WO2020143730A1 WO 2020143730 A1 WO2020143730 A1 WO 2020143730A1 CN 2020071273 W CN2020071273 W CN 2020071273W WO 2020143730 A1 WO2020143730 A1 WO 2020143730A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
bwp
terminal device
switching
network
configuration information
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2020/071273
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
黎超
王俊伟
张兴炜
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2020143730A1 publication Critical patent/WO2020143730A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W28/00Network traffic management; Network resource management
    • H04W28/16Central resource management; Negotiation of resources or communication parameters, e.g. negotiating bandwidth or QoS [Quality of Service]
    • H04W28/18Negotiating wireless communication parameters
    • H04W28/20Negotiating bandwidth
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/0005Control or signalling for completing the hand-off
    • H04W36/0083Determination of parameters used for hand-off, e.g. generation or modification of neighbour cell lists
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/16Performing reselection for specific purposes
    • H04W36/18Performing reselection for specific purposes for allowing seamless reselection, e.g. soft reselection

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of communication, and more specifically, to a communication method and communication device.
  • BWP bandwidth (part of bandwidth)
  • the base station When the terminal device performs BWP handover, the base station (node, base, NB) needs to reconfigure the BWP parameters of the terminal device. During the parameter reconfiguration process, the radio frequency (RF) module needs to be switched, which will cause transmission interruption. Communication reliability is affected.
  • RF radio frequency
  • the present application provides a communication method and a communication device, which can improve communication reliability.
  • a method of communication is provided.
  • the method provided in the first aspect may be executed by a first terminal device, or may be executed by a chip configured in the first terminal device, which is not limited in this application.
  • the method includes: the first terminal device obtains configuration information of the bandwidth part BWP corresponding to at least two connection states respectively, the connection state is a connection state between the terminal device and the network device, and the at least two connection states include idle State, connection state or outside the network, the BWPs corresponding to the at least two connection states are used for side links; the first terminal device according to the configuration information of the first BWP and the configuration information of the second BWP in the configuration information, from The first BWP is switched to the second BWP; wherein, the first BWP and the second BWP belong to the BWP corresponding to the at least two connection states respectively.
  • the first terminal device obtains configuration information of the bandwidth part BWP corresponding to at least two connection states respectively, and according to the configuration information of the first BWP configuration information and the second BWP configuration information , Switching from the first BWP to the second BWP, where the first BWP and the second BWP belong to the BWP corresponding to the at least two connection states respectively.
  • This method enables the terminal devices performing communication to perform the same BWP switching, reduces the communication interruption caused by the BWP switching, and improves the communication reliability.
  • the BWPs corresponding to the at least two connection states include: one BWP corresponding to the idle state; and/or, at least one BWP corresponding to the outside of the network, and/or, the connection state Corresponding to at least one BWP.
  • the method before the handover from the first BWP to the second BWP, the method further includes: the first terminal device receives handover instruction information from the network device or the second terminal device, where , The switching instruction information is used to instruct the first terminal device to switch from the first BWP to the second BWP; the switching from the first BWP to the second BWP includes: the first terminal device according to the configuration information The configuration information of a BWP, the configuration information of the second BWP, and the switching instruction information are switched from the first BWP to the second BWP.
  • the first terminal device when the first terminal device is in a connected state, the first terminal device receives the handover instruction information from the network device; or, when the first terminal device is in an idle state Or outside the network, the first terminal device receives the handover instruction information from the second terminal device.
  • the method before the handover from the first BWP to the second BWP, the method further includes: the first terminal device sends the handover instruction information to the third terminal device.
  • the connected first terminal device can send the switching instruction information to the terminal device outside the network through the side link to ensure that the terminal devices communicating in the communication system simultaneously switch BWP, reducing Communication interruption caused by multiple BWP handovers improves communication reliability.
  • the handover indication information is also used to indicate at least one of the following information: the time when the handover starts; the time when the handover is completed, or the duration of the BWP handover; in the second Transmission resources on BWP.
  • the switching start information is indicated by the switching instruction information, and/or the switching completion time or the duration of the BWP switching, the terminal device receiving the switching instruction information starts the BWP switching at the same time period, avoiding the switching caused by multiple BWPs at different times Communication was interrupted multiple times.
  • the first terminal device switches from the first BWP to the second BWP according to the configuration information of the first BWP and the configuration information of the second BWP in the configuration information, including : The first terminal device switches from the first BWP to the second BWP according to the configuration information of the first BWP and the configuration information of the second BWP in the configuration information, and the pre-configuration switching condition; the pre-configuration switching condition is Correspondence between the switching of the connection state of the first terminal device and the switching of BWP.
  • the first terminal device When the connection state between the first terminal device and the network device changes, for example, when the first terminal device is switched from outside the network to the idle state, the first terminal device performs BWP switching according to the pre-configured switching conditions pre-configured by the system.
  • the pre-configured switching condition includes: in a case where the first terminal device switches from a connected state to an idle state, the first terminal device corresponds to at least one of the connected state A BWP in the BWP switches to a BWP corresponding to the idle state; or in the case where the first terminal device switches from the idle state to the connected state, the first terminal device switches from a BWP corresponding to the idle state to the connection One BWP of the at least one BWP corresponding to the state; or in the case where the first terminal device switches from the connected state to the outside of the network, the first terminal device switches from a BWP corresponding to the connected state to at least the corresponding outside the network A BWP in a BWP; or in the case where the first terminal device is switched from outside the network to the connected state, the first terminal device is switched from a corresponding BWP outside the network to at least one BWP corresponding to the connected state A BWP; or when the first terminal device is switched
  • the configuration information includes time-frequency resources of the BWP corresponding to the at least two connection states, wherein the time-frequency resources of the at least one BWP corresponding to the connection state correspond to the idle state A subset of the time-frequency resources of the BWP; and/or, the corresponding time-frequency resources of at least one BWP outside the network is a subset of the time-frequency resources of the BWP corresponding to the idle state; and/or, the corresponding The time-frequency resource of at least one BWP is a subset of the time-frequency resource of at least one BWP corresponding to the outside of the network; and/or the time-frequency resource of the BWP corresponding to the idle state is the time-frequency of at least one BWP corresponding to the outside of the network A subset of resources.
  • the configuration information configures the relationship between time-frequency resources between different connection states, so that terminal devices in different connection states can also communicate normally.
  • the method before the handover from the first BWP to the second BWP, the method further includes: the first terminal device sends the BWP handover supported by the first terminal device to the network device Delay type; wherein, different switching delay types of BWP supported by the first terminal device correspond to different BWP switching delays.
  • the terminal device needs to send the supported BWP type to the network device to determine the switching duration before performing the BWP switching.
  • the method further includes: the first terminal device obtains a first switching duration, where the first switching duration is a BWP switching duration supported by a pair of terminal devices or a group of terminal devices The maximum value of the BWP handover delay corresponding to the delay type; the first terminal device does not send data within the first handover time period after the start of handover.
  • the network device After receiving the supported BWP switching delay type sent by the terminal device, the network device determines that the maximum value of the switching duration corresponding to the BWP switching delay type is the duration of simultaneous switching, that is, the first switching duration. Within the first handover duration, when the handover delay corresponding to a supported BWP type is less than the first handover duration, the terminal device does not send data after the handover is complete, and does not send data before the end of the first handover duration. The communication terminal device has not been switched, and normal communication cannot be performed.
  • the method further includes: after switching from the first BWP to the second BWP, the first terminal device receives first indication information, where the first indication information is used for The first terminal device determines that the first BWP handover is successful.
  • the first indication information includes at least one of the following: indication information of the first BWP; indication information of the second BWP; time interval information, the time interval information Indicates the interval between the start time or completion time of the handover from the first BWP to the second BWP and the transmission time of the first indication information.
  • the method further includes: after the handover from the first BWP to the second BWP, the first terminal device sends second indication information, where the second indication information is used It is determined that the first BWP handover is successful.
  • the second indication information includes at least one of the following: indication information of the first BWP; indication information of the second BWP; indication of successful BWP handover.
  • the first terminal device and the network device may send instruction information to each other to determine that the first terminal device is successfully switched .
  • the network device sends first indication information to the first terminal device, or the first terminal device sends second indication information to the network device.
  • the handover indication information is also used to indicate that the currently activated M BWPs are switched at the same time.
  • the M BWPs include the BWP of the side link and the BWP of the cellular link, where M is Positive integer greater than 1.
  • the BWP of the side link and the BWP of the cellular link are on one carrier or multiple carriers.
  • the method further includes: before the currently activated M BWPs are simultaneously switched, the first terminal device sends the following information to the network device: whether to support simultaneous switching of the cellular link The total number of BWP and BWP of the side link; or the total number of BWP that supports simultaneous switching of the cellular link and the BWP of the side link; and/or the simultaneous switching of the BWP of the cellular link and the side Under the condition of the BWP of the downlink, the number of simultaneous BWP handovers supported by the cellular link and the number of BWP simultaneously switched among the BWPs supporting the side link; or the BWP supporting the switching of the cellular link and the side line at the same time Under the BWP condition of the link, it supports simultaneous switching of the BWP switching delay or the switching delay type of the cellular link and the BWP switching delay or the switching delay type of the side link.
  • the handover instruction information indicates that the currently simultaneously activated cellular link BWP and the side link BWP are simultaneously switched, which avoids the interruption of communication to other working BWP when part of the BWP is switched due to the inconsistent switching time in the simultaneously activated BWP.
  • a communication method is provided.
  • the method provided in the second aspect may be executed by a first terminal device, or may be executed by a chip configured in the first terminal device, which is not limited in this application.
  • the method includes: the first terminal device obtains first switching instruction information, where the first switching instruction information is used to indicate the currently activated switching of M bandwidth parts BWP, where M is a positive integer greater than 1; the first A terminal device performs BWP switching according to the first switching instruction information.
  • the first terminal device receives the first indication information and instructs that the BWPs that are simultaneously activated are switched simultaneously.
  • the link types of the currently activated M BWPs are the same or different, where the link types of the BWP include: the BWP of the cellular link and the BWP of the side link .
  • the first handover indication information includes any one of the following: indicating that N BWPs of the currently activated M BWPs are simultaneously switched, where N is not greater than M A positive integer; indicates whether N BWPs of the currently activated M BWPs are switched simultaneously, where N is a positive integer not greater than M; indicates that N BWPs of the currently activated M BWPs are switched, where N It is a positive integer not greater than M; indication information indicating whether to switch the BWP of the cellular link and the BWP of the side link at the same time.
  • the method includes: before performing BWP switching according to the first switching instruction information, reporting the following information to the network device: whether simultaneous activation of more than one BWP is supported; or simultaneous activation is supported The number of BWP; or whether it supports the simultaneous activation of the BWP of the cellular link and the BWP of the side link; or the total number of BWP that supports the simultaneous activation of the cellular link and the BWP of the side link; and/or Under the condition of supporting simultaneous activation of the BWP of the cellular link and the BWP of the side link, the number of simultaneous activations of the BWP of the cellular link and the number of simultaneous activations of the BWP supporting the side link; or whether it supports simultaneous Switching the BWP of the cellular link and the BWP of the side link; or the total number of BWPs supporting the switching of the cellular link and the BWP of the side link simultaneously; and/or supporting the switching of the switching cellular link simultaneously The number
  • the first handover indication information is carried by any one or more of SIB, RRC, MAC CE, or DCI.
  • the value of M is 2, and the value of N is 1 or 2.
  • the N BWPs that are switched simultaneously may be BWPs of the same type, for example, the N BWPs are N cellular link BWPs or N side link BWPs. It can also be a different type of BWP, for example, N BWPs include a cellular link BWP and a side link BWP. This embodiment of the present application does not limit this.
  • the M BWPs are on one carrier or multiple different carriers.
  • the method further includes: before performing BWP handover according to the first handover instruction information, acquiring the BWP of the cellular link and/or the BWP of the side link Configuration information.
  • the configuration information may be sent by the network device to the terminal device.
  • the network device sends configuration information to the terminal device through configured broadcast or multicast configuration signaling.
  • the configuration signaling may be any one or a combination of SIB, RRC, MAC or DCI.
  • a communication method is provided.
  • the method provided in the third aspect may be executed by the first terminal device, or may be executed by a chip configured in the first terminal device, which is not limited in this application.
  • the method includes: the first terminal device acquires configuration information of a timer corresponding to the first bandwidth part BWP of the side link; the first terminal device manages the timer according to the configuration information of the timer; When the timer expires, the first BWP of the side link is switched to the second BWP of the side link, where the first BWP of the side link is the BWP of the currently activated side link.
  • the second BWP is the BWP of the side link of the terminal device in the idle state or the BWP used for the side link outside the network.
  • the timer expiration means that the value of the timer exceeds a predefined, signaling configuration, or pre-configured timer duration.
  • the timing configuration information includes: the step size of the timer and/or the duration of the timer.
  • the configuration information manages the timer by configuring the timer step size and/or timer duration. For example, when the value of the timer exceeds the preset timer value, the timer expires.
  • the timer step size and/or the timer duration is associated with at least one of the following parameters: the service type of the side link; the side link The quality of service parameters; the subcarrier spacing value of the side link; the resource pool used by the side link; the waveform type of the side link.
  • the step size of the timer and/or the duration of the timer can be adaptively configured according to actual needs. For example, when the quality of service of the side link is high, the step size of the timer and/or the duration of the timer are smaller. The specific parameters depend on the actual needs.
  • the method further includes: if the first condition is satisfied, starting or restarting the timer.
  • the timer is started at this time.
  • the timer restarts. If, when the first condition is satisfied, the timer has been started, the timer is restarted.
  • the first condition includes any one of the following conditions: the terminal device is in a connected state and receives downlink control information for scheduling a cellular link sent by the network device; the terminal device The downlink control information for scheduling the side link sent by the network device is detected; the terminal device sends the buffer status of the side link, the scheduling request of the side link, the HARQ response message of the side link to the network device or The CSI feedback information of the side link; the terminal device receives the ACK response information of the side link; the terminal device successfully detects the side control information SCI of the side link.
  • the managing the timer includes: when the timer is running and the timer does not detect any of the following information within the corresponding step time, increase The value of this timer: when the network device sends downlink control information for scheduling the cellular link; when the network device sends downlink control information for scheduling the side link; when the side link ACK response information; when the side link When the side control information is SCI.
  • the timer values of the network device and the terminal device are compared to determine whether the understanding of scheduling information between the network device and the terminal device is consistent. If the timer value is the same, it means that the understanding of the scheduling information is consistent and the communication is normal; if the timer value is different, it means that the understanding of the scheduling information is inconsistent and the network device and the terminal device cannot communicate normally.
  • the time of each step of the timer is pre-configured according to the transmission resource of the side link.
  • the method further includes: when the timer expires, the first terminal device in the connected state sends the network device an indication message that the timer expires or the terminal device wants Instruction information to perform BWP handover of the side link.
  • the first terminal device sends the indication information that the timer expires to the network device, and after receiving the indication information that the timer expires, the network device instructs the first terminal device to perform a BWP switch, for example, the network device sends the switch to the first terminal device Instructions.
  • a communication method is provided.
  • the method provided in the fourth aspect may be performed by a network device or a chip configured in the network device, which is not limited in this application.
  • the method includes: the network device determines configuration information of the bandwidth part BWP corresponding to at least two connection states of the first terminal device, the connection state is a connection state between the terminal device and the network device, and the at least two connection states
  • the network device sends configuration information to the first terminal device through configured broadcast or multicast configuration signaling.
  • the configuration signaling may be any one or a combination of SIB, RRC, MAC CE or DCI.
  • the BWPs corresponding to the at least two connection states respectively include: one BWP corresponding to the idle state; and/or, at least one BWP corresponding to the outside of the network, and/or, the connection state Corresponding to at least one BWP.
  • the method further includes: when the first terminal device is in a connected state, the network device sends handover instruction information to the first terminal device, where the handover instruction information is used To instruct the first terminal device to switch from the first BWP to the second BWP.
  • the first BWP is the BWP corresponding to the connected state
  • the second BWP is the BWP corresponding to the connected state
  • the first BWP is the BWP corresponding to the connected state
  • the second BWP is the BWP corresponding to the idle state
  • the first A BWP is a BWP corresponding to a connected state
  • the second BWP is a corresponding BWP outside the network
  • the first BWP is a BWP corresponding to an idle state
  • the second BWP is a BWP corresponding to a connected state
  • the first BWP is idle
  • the second BWP is the corresponding BWP outside the network
  • the first BWP is the corresponding BWP outside the network
  • the second BWP is the BWP corresponding to the connected state
  • the first BWP is the corresponding BWP outside the network.
  • the second BWP is the BWP corresponding to the idle state.
  • the handover indication information is also used to indicate at least one of the following information: the time when the handover starts; the time when the handover is completed, or the duration of the BWP handover; in the second Transmission resources on BWP.
  • the method further includes: the network device sends a pre-configured switching condition to the first terminal device, where the pre-configured switching condition is the switching of the connection state of the first terminal device and the BWP Correspondence of switching.
  • the pre-configured switching condition includes: in a case where the first terminal device switches from a connected state to an idle state, the first terminal device corresponds to at least one corresponding to the connected state A BWP in the BWP switches to a BWP corresponding to the idle state; or in the case where the first terminal device switches from the idle state to the connected state, the first terminal device switches from a BWP corresponding to the idle state to the connection One BWP of the at least one BWP corresponding to the state; or in the case where the first terminal device switches from the connected state to the outside of the network, the first terminal device switches from a BWP corresponding to the connected state to at least the corresponding outside the network A BWP in a BWP; or in the case where the first terminal device is switched from outside the network to the connected state, the first terminal device is switched from a corresponding BWP outside the network to at least one BWP corresponding to the connected state A BWP; or when the first terminal device
  • the configuration information includes time-frequency resources of the BWP corresponding to the at least two connection states, wherein the time-frequency resources of the at least one BWP corresponding to the connection state correspond to the idle state A subset of the time-frequency resources of the BWP; and/or, the corresponding time-frequency resources of at least one BWP outside the network is a subset of the time-frequency resources of the BWP corresponding to the idle state; and/or, the corresponding The time-frequency resource of at least one BWP is a subset of the time-frequency resource of at least one BWP corresponding to the outside of the network; and/or the time-frequency resource of the BWP corresponding to the idle state is the time-frequency of at least one BWP corresponding to the outside of the network A subset of resources.
  • the method further includes: the network device receiving the BWP handover delay type supported by the first terminal device and sent by the first terminal device; wherein, the first terminal device supports Different BWP switching delay types correspond to different BWP switching delays.
  • the method further includes: the network device sends a first switching duration to the first terminal device, where the first switching duration is supported by a pair of terminal devices or a group of terminal devices The maximum value of the BWP switching delay corresponding to the type of BWP switching delay; the first terminal device does not send data within the time of the first switching duration after starting the switching.
  • the first indication information includes at least one of the following: indication information of the first BWP; indication information of the second BWP; time interval information, the time interval information Indicates the interval between the start time or completion time of the handover from the first BWP to the second BWP and the transmission time of the first indication information.
  • the method further includes: the network device receives second indication information sent by the first terminal device, where the second indication information is used to determine that the first BWP handover is successful .
  • the second indication information includes at least one of the following: indication information of the first BWP; indication information of the second BWP; indication of successful BWP handover.
  • the handover indication information is also used to instruct the currently activated M BWPs to switch simultaneously.
  • the M BWPs include the BWP of the side link and the BWP of the cellular link, where M is Positive integer greater than 1.
  • the BWP of the side link and the BWP of the cellular link are on one carrier or multiple carriers.
  • the method further includes: before the currently activated M BWPs are simultaneously switched, the network device receives the following information sent by the first terminal device: whether to support simultaneous switching of the cellular The BWP of the link and the BWP of the side link; or the total number of BWPs that support simultaneous switching of the cellular link and the BWP of the side link; and/or the BWP and Under the BWP condition of the side link, the number of simultaneous BWP handovers supported by the cellular link and the number of BWP simultaneously switched among the BWPs supporting the side link; or BWP and the Under the BWP condition of the side link, the switching delay or the switching delay type of the BWP of the cellular link and the switching delay or the switching delay type of the BWP of the side link are simultaneously supported.
  • a communication method is provided.
  • the method provided in the fifth aspect may be performed by a network device or a chip configured in the network device, which is not limited in this application.
  • the method includes: the network device determines first switching instruction information of the first terminal device, wherein the first switching instruction information is used to indicate the currently activated switching of M bandwidth parts BWP, where M is a positive integer greater than 1
  • the network device sends the first switching instruction information to the first terminal device.
  • the currently activated M BWPs have the same or different link types, where the BWP link types include: cellular link BWP and side link BWP .
  • the first switching indication information includes any one of the following: indicating that N BWPs of the currently activated M BWPs perform switching simultaneously, where N is not greater than M A positive integer; indicates whether N BWPs of the currently activated M BWPs are switched simultaneously, where N is a positive integer not greater than M; indicates that N BWPs of the currently activated M BWPs are switched, where N It is a positive integer not greater than M; indication information indicating whether to switch the BWP of the cellular link and the BWP of the side link at the same time.
  • the method includes: before the first terminal device performs BWP switching according to the first switching instruction information, the network device receives the following information sent by the first terminal device: Whether it supports simultaneous activation of more than one BWP; or the number of simultaneously activated BWP; or whether it supports simultaneous activation of the BWP of the cellular link and the BWP of the side link; or the simultaneous activation of the BWP of the cellular link and the side line
  • the number of simultaneous BWP activations of the channel or whether it supports the simultaneous switching of the BWP of the cellular link and the BWP of the side link; or the total number of simultaneous switching of the BWP of the cellular link and the BWP of the side link; And/or under the
  • the first handover indication information is carried by any one or more of SIB, RRC, MAC CE, or DCI.
  • the value of M is 2, and the value of N is 1 or 2.
  • the M BWPs are on one carrier or multiple different carriers.
  • the method further includes: before performing BWP handover according to the first handover instruction information, acquiring the BWP of the cellular link and/or the BWP of the side link Configuration information.
  • a communication method is provided.
  • the method provided in the sixth aspect may be performed by a network device or a chip configured in the network device, which is not limited in this application.
  • the method includes: the network device determines the configuration information of the timer corresponding to the first bandwidth part BWP of the first terminal device; the network device sends the configuration information to the first terminal device.
  • the configuration information is used by the first terminal device to manage the timer. If the timer expires, switch from the first BWP of the side link to the BWP of the second side link, where the first BWP of the side link is the BWP of the currently activated side link, and the second side
  • the downlink BWP is the BWP of the side link of the terminal device in the idle state or the BWP of the side link used outside the network.
  • the timer expiration means that the value of the timer exceeds a predefined, signaling configuration, or pre-configured timer duration.
  • the timing configuration information includes: the step size of the timer and/or the duration of the timer.
  • the timer step size and/or the timer duration is associated with at least one of the following parameters: service type of the side link; side link The quality of service parameters; the subcarrier spacing value of the side link; the resource pool used by the side link; the waveform type of the side link.
  • the managing the timer includes: when the timer is running and the timer does not detect any of the following information within the corresponding step time, increase The value of this timer: when the network device sends downlink control information for scheduling the cellular link; when the network device sends downlink control information for scheduling the side link; when the side link ACK response information; when the side link When the side control information is SCI.
  • the time of each step of the timer is pre-configured according to the transmission resource of the side link.
  • the method further includes: when the timer expires, the first terminal device in the connected state sends the network device an indication message that the timer expires or the terminal device wants Instruction information to perform BWP handover of the side link.
  • a communication device in a seventh aspect, is provided.
  • the communication apparatus may be used to perform the operation of the terminal device in the first aspect and any possible implementation manner of the first aspect, or to perform the operation of the terminal device in the second aspect and any possible implementation manner of the second aspect Operation, or used to perform the operation of the terminal device in the third aspect and any possible implementation manner of the third aspect, specifically, the communication apparatus includes the method described in any of the first aspect to the third aspect Corresponding to the steps or functions. This step or function can be implemented by software, or by hardware, or by a combination of hardware and software.
  • a communication device is provided.
  • the communication apparatus may be used to perform the operation of the terminal device in the fourth aspect and any possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, or to perform the operation of the terminal device in the fifth aspect and any possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect Operation, or used to perform the operation of the terminal device in the sixth aspect and any possible implementation manner of the sixth aspect, specifically, the communication device includes the method described in any of the fourth aspect to the sixth aspect Corresponding to the steps or functions. This step or function can be implemented by software, or by hardware, or by a combination of hardware and software.
  • a computer program product includes: a computer program (also referred to as code or instructions) that, when the computer program is executed, causes the computer to perform the first to sixth aspects Any one of the possible implementation methods of communication.
  • a computer-readable storage medium that stores a program that causes a server in a computer to perform any one of the first to sixth aspects and various implementations thereof Kinds of communication methods.
  • the computer-readable storage medium is used to store computer software instructions for the above-mentioned server, which includes instructions designed to perform any of the communication methods in any possible implementation manner of any of the first to sixth aspects program.
  • a chip system includes a processor for supporting a server in a computer to implement the functions involved in the foregoing first to sixth aspects and various implementations thereof.
  • Figure 1 is a schematic diagram of a D2D scene
  • Figure 2 is a schematic diagram of a V2X scene
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of four scenarios of BWP reconfiguration according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic flowchart of a communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of a scenario where a side link is used to send information
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of a handover preparation window provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic flowchart of a communication method provided by another embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic flowchart of a communication method according to another embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic structural diagram of a first terminal device applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device according to another embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
  • D2D device-to-device
  • V2X vehicle to everything
  • MTC machine communication
  • M2M machine-to-machine communication
  • the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application can also be applied to communication between the serving base station and terminal devices in various scenarios, such as cellular link communication.
  • the embodiments of the present application take side link communication as an example, but the embodiments of the present application are not limited to this.
  • the terminal device in the embodiments of the present application may refer to user equipment, access terminal, user unit, user station, mobile station, mobile station, remote station, remote terminal, mobile device, user terminal, terminal, wireless communication device, user agent or User device.
  • Terminal devices can also be cellular phones, cordless phones, session initiation protocol (SIP) phones, wireless local loop (WLL) stations, personal digital assistants (personal digital assistants, PDAs), and wireless communication Functional handheld devices, computing devices or other processing devices connected to wireless modems, in-vehicle devices, wearable devices, terminal devices in future 5G networks or public land mobile communication networks (PLMN) in the future evolution
  • SIP session initiation protocol
  • WLL wireless local loop
  • PDAs personal digital assistants
  • the terminal device and the like are not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • D2D communication links (called sidelinks, sidelinks, SL) consider multiplexing existing Spectrum resources of mobile communication networks.
  • D2D communication does not use the downlink (DL) spectrum resources of the advanced long-term evolution (advanced-advanced, LTE-A) system, but only reuses the uplink (downlink, DL) spectrum resources of the LTE-A system.
  • Uplink (UP) spectrum resources because relatively speaking, the anti-interference ability of the base station is much better than ordinary terminal equipment.
  • D2D devices are more likely to time-division multiplex the uplink spectrum resources, so that they do not need to support simultaneous transmission and reception, and only need to send or receive at a time.
  • D2D scenarios can be divided into three types with network coverage, partial network coverage, and no network coverage, as shown in Figure 1.
  • D2D devices are within the coverage of network devices in scenarios with network coverage; in some network coverage scenarios, some D2D devices are within the coverage of network devices, and other D2D devices are not in the coverage of network devices; in scenarios without network coverage , All D2D devices are not in the coverage of network devices.
  • the terminal equipment can hear the signal of the network equipment, it is the terminal equipment in the network coverage; if the terminal equipment can hear the signal of other terminal equipment in the network coverage, it is part of the network coverage terminal equipment; if the terminal equipment can not receive the network equipment The signal cannot receive the signal of other terminal equipment within the network coverage, and is the terminal equipment outside the network coverage.
  • V2X Vehicle to outside information exchange (vehicle to everything, V2X): In the Rel-14/15/16 version, V2X as a major application of D2D technology was successfully established. V2X will optimize the specific application requirements of V2X on the basis of the existing D2D technology. It is necessary to further reduce the access delay of V2X equipment and solve the resource conflict problem.
  • V2X includes vehicle networking or vehicle-to-vehicle (V2V), vehicle-to-pedestrian (V2P), vehicle-to-infrastructure communication or network (vehicle to infrastructure/network, V2I/N). Application requirements are shown in Figure 2.
  • V2V refers to inter-vehicle communication based on a long-term evolution (LTE) system
  • V2P refers to communication between LTE-based vehicles and people (including pedestrians, cyclists, drivers, or passengers);
  • V2I refers to the communication between LTE-based vehicles and roadside units (RSUs).
  • RSUs roadside units
  • V2N refers to the communication between LTE-based vehicles and base stations/networks.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of four possible scenarios to which embodiments of the present application can be applied.
  • the vertical axis is a time axis in microseconds (us)
  • the horizontal axis is a frequency axis in megahertz (MHz).
  • Carrier 1 and carrier 2 are two different carriers. It should be understood that the embodiment of the present application only uses multiple terminal devices working on two carriers as an example for description. In practice, the terminal device may also work on multiple carriers such as 3, 5 and so on. This is not limited.
  • Scenario 1 Changing the center frequency of BWP.
  • the BWP bandwidth before switching is 100 MHz, and the center frequency is 50 MHz.
  • the center frequency of the BWP after switching is 150 MHz, but the bandwidth of the BWP has not changed.
  • Scenario 2 The bandwidth of BWP is changed, but the center frequency of BWP is not changed.
  • the BWP bandwidth before switching is 100MHz
  • the center frequency is 100MHz
  • the BWP bandwidth after switching is 200MHz, but the center frequency is not changed and is still 100MHz .
  • Scenario 3 Simultaneously changing the center frequency and bandwidth of BWP.
  • the BWP bandwidth before switching is 200MHz
  • the center frequency is 100MHz
  • the BWP bandwidth after switching is 100MHz
  • the center frequency is 350MHz.
  • the working Both the BWP bandwidth and the center frequency are changed.
  • Scenario 4 The center frequency and bandwidth of BWP are not changed, only some baseband configurable parameters are changed.
  • the BWP bandwidth before switching is 100MHz
  • the center frequency is 350MHz
  • the BWP bandwidth after switching is 100MHz
  • the center frequency is 350MHz.
  • the working The BWP bandwidth and center frequency are not changed, only some of the baseband parameters are changed, such as the type of subcarrier spacing (SCS) and cyclic prefix (CP).
  • SCS subcarrier spacing
  • CP cyclic prefix
  • the switching delay requirements are different.
  • the corresponding frequency range is divided into frequency range 1 (Frequency Range1, FR1) and frequency range 2 (Frequency Range2, FR2), where the frequency corresponding to FR1 is less than 6 GHz, and the frequency corresponding to FR2 is greater than 6 GHz.
  • Table 1 shows the switching delay parameters of BWP in four different scenarios shown in FIG. 3 in different frequency ranges.
  • Type 1 and type 2 in Table 1 represent the two types of BWP. Different BWP types correspond to different BWP switching delays. As can be seen from Table 1, for the same scenario, the type 2 corresponding BWP switching delay is greater than BWP switching delay corresponding to type 1. For example, in scenario 1, the BWP switching delay corresponding to type 1 is 600us, and the BWP switching delay corresponding to type 2 is 2000us; in scenario 4, the BWP switching delay corresponding to type 1 is 400us, and the BWP switching delay corresponding to type 2 The extension is 950us.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a communication method, which can effectively reduce communication interruption caused by BWP switching and improve communication quality and reliability.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic flowchart of a communication method 400 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the method 400 includes S401 to S408, where S402 to S405, S407, and S408 are optional steps. These steps will be described in detail below.
  • the first terminal device obtains the configuration information of the BWP corresponding to at least two connection states, and according to the configuration information of the first BWP and the configuration information of the second BWP in the configuration information, the first terminal device Switching the first BWP to the second BWP reduces communication interruption caused by the first terminal device during BWP switching, thereby improving communication reliability.
  • the first terminal device obtains configuration information of the bandwidth part BWP corresponding to at least two connection states.
  • connection state is the connection state between the terminal device and the network device, including the connection state, out-of-network and idle state.
  • the BWPs corresponding to the at least two connection states are used for the side link.
  • connection states of the terminal device respectively correspond to corresponding BWPs, so when the connection state of the terminal device and the network device changes, there may be a BWP switch.
  • the terminal device changes from the connected state to the idle state, or from the idle state to the connected state.
  • the terminal device needs to switch from a BWP corresponding to the connected state to a BWP corresponding to the idle state.
  • the terminal device performs BWP switching, it is necessary to acquire corresponding configuration information, and the terminal device performs corresponding BWP switching according to the acquired configuration information.
  • connection state of the terminal device changes differently, and the BWP switching performed is also different.
  • the terminal device switches between the BWP corresponding to the connected state and the corresponding BWP outside the network; and/or, the terminal device switches between the BWP corresponding to the connected state and the BWP corresponding to the idle state; and/or, the terminal device is on the network Switch between the BWP corresponding to the external state and the BWP corresponding to the idle state.
  • the BWPs corresponding to the at least two connection states may be one BWP corresponding to the idle state and at least one BWP corresponding to the outside of the network; or, one BWP corresponding to the idle state and at least one BWP corresponding to the connected state; or the network At least one BWP corresponding to the external and/or at least one BWP corresponding to the connected state.
  • the configuration information may be sent by the network device to the first terminal device.
  • the network device sends configuration information to the first terminal device through configured broadcast or multicast configuration signaling.
  • the configuration signaling may be a system message block (system information block, SIB), radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC), media access control (media access control, MAC), or a downlink control signal (download control signal, DCI).
  • the first terminal device sends the BWP switching delay type supported by the first terminal device to the network device.
  • the network device determines the first switching duration.
  • the network device determines the switching duration corresponding to the BWP supported by the terminal device according to Table 1 according to the supported BWP switching delay type reported by the first terminal device. It is determined that the maximum value of the switching delay in the BWP switching delay type supported by the first terminal device reported by the first terminal device is the first switching time.
  • the first handover duration is the maximum value of the handover delay reported by the pair of unicast terminals respectively; when the communication service is a multicast service, the handover duration is this The maximum value of the switching delay reported by the terminal devices that perform multicast respectively; when the communication service is a broadcast service, the switching delay is the maximum value of the switching delay reported by all terminal devices that perform broadcasting.
  • the maximum value of the BWP switching delay corresponding to the terminal device is determined according to different communication service types, and the maximum switching delay is determined as the first switching duration for BWP switching, to ensure that multiple BWP switching is completed at the same time, and to improve communication quality and reliability.
  • the communication system may pre-define the first switching duration to be the switching time corresponding to all types of BWP according to the existing types of switching delays of several BWPs The maximum value. At this time, steps S402 and S403 may not be executed.
  • the predefined first switching duration can be For 2000us, the terminal device that performs BWP switching can complete the BWP switching within the switching duration of 2000us.
  • the first terminal device acquires the first switching duration.
  • the network device determines the first switching duration according to the supported BWP switching delay type reported by the first terminal device, and then sends the first switching duration to the first terminal device.
  • the handover delays of different types of BWP are different, in order to ensure the simultaneous handover of multiple BWPs, when the first terminal device does not change within the first handover time period after the start of handover send data.
  • the first handover duration is 5ms
  • the first terminal device takes 2ms to switch from the first BWP of the side link to the second BWP of the side link. In the remaining 3ms, the first terminal device does not send any data.
  • the BWPs that are switched simultaneously complete the handover at the same time, avoiding multiple communication terminals caused by BWP handovers and improving communication reliability.
  • this step S404 may not be performed.
  • the first terminal device obtains BWP switching instruction information. That is, the first terminal device receives switching instruction information from the network device or the second terminal device, where the switching instruction information is used to instruct the first terminal device to switch from the first BWP to the second BWP.
  • the switching instruction information of the BWP needs to be obtained before the switching.
  • the switching instruction information is used to instruct the first terminal device to perform BWP switching, for example, switching from the first BWP to the second BWP.
  • the manner of acquiring the handover indication information is different.
  • the handover instruction information is sent by the network device to the first terminal device, and the first terminal device receives the handover instruction information from the network device.
  • the network device when there are multiple terminal devices in the communication system, some of which are outside the network, when the network device sends the handover instruction information to the terminal device through a downlink control signal (download control signal, DCI), because the terminal device is in the network
  • the external terminal device cannot communicate with the network device and cannot receive the switching instruction information.
  • the handover instruction information may be sent to the terminal device outside the network through the side link communication according to the terminal device in the network.
  • the first terminal device when the first terminal device is outside the network, the first terminal device receives the switching instruction information from the second terminal device.
  • the second terminal device is a terminal device in the network, which is only used as an example here.
  • the first terminal device is in the network and can receive the switching instruction information sent by the network device through DCI, but the second terminal device and the third terminal device outside the network cannot receive the switching instruction information sent by the network device through DCI, Then, the first terminal device sends the received handover instruction information sent by the network device through DCI to the second terminal device and the third terminal device through sidelink control information (sidelink control signal, SCI). For example, the first terminal device sends switching instruction information to the second terminal device.
  • sidelink control information sidelink control signal, SCI
  • the switching instruction information may indicate BWP switching of the first terminal device and the second terminal device in unicast, or the switching instruction information may indicate BWP switching of multiple terminal devices in multicast or broadcast, wherein the The multiple terminal devices include the first terminal device.
  • the first terminal device may also receive the handover instruction information within a handover preparation window, and within the handover preparation window, the network device sends the handover instruction information multiple times to enable the multiple terminal devices before the handover begins Both received the switching instruction information.
  • the first terminal device outside the network may receive the handover instruction information within a handover preparation window, and within the handover preparation window, the second terminal device within the network sends the handover instruction information multiple times to make the The first terminal device receives the switching instruction information before starting the switching.
  • the switching instruction information includes configuration information of the switching preparation window
  • the configuration information of the switching window includes at least one of the following: configuration information of the duration of the switching preparation window; configuration information of the start time of the switching preparation window; end of the switching preparation window Time configuration information.
  • the configuration information of the handover preparation window may also be sent before the handover instruction information, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the first terminal device works on BWP1, and the handover instruction information instructs the first terminal device to switch from BWP1 to BWP2.
  • the communicating terminal devices In order for the communicating terminal devices to reliably receive the switching instruction information and avoid failing to detect the DCI at the same time, they cannot do BWP switching at the same time.
  • the network device needs to send the DCI message to the terminal device that performs BWP switching multiple times in the network, as shown in Figure 6 5 DCI messages are sent separately in each handover preparation window.
  • the DCI messages sent by the network device multiple times may have the same content or different content, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the handover indication information is also used to indicate at least one of the following information: the time when the handover starts; the time when the handover is completed, or the duration of the BWP handover; and the transmission resource on the second BWP.
  • the switching instruction information instructs the first terminal device to switch from the first BWP to the second BWP according to the instruction information.
  • the first terminal device successfully detects the PDCCH corresponding to the RNTI that triggers the BWP switching, and the first terminal device switches from the first BWP corresponding to the connected state to the second BWP corresponding to the connected state.
  • the handover instruction information indicates the time when the handover starts and the time when the handover is completed, that is, when the first terminal device starts BWP handover and when it stops BWP handover. For example, if the switching instruction information indicates that the start time is 1 ms and the switching completion time is 3 ms, the first terminal device starts BWP switching at 1 ms, and the BWP switching ends at 3 ms.
  • the handover instruction information may also indicate the time when the handover starts and the duration of the BWP handover. For example, if the switching instruction information indicates that the BWP switching start time is 1 ms and the switching duration is 3 ms, the first terminal device starts BWP switching at the 1 ms time, and the BWP switching ends after the switching process continues for 3 ms, that is, the BWP switching at the 3 ms time End.
  • the handover instruction information may also indicate the time when the handover is completed and the duration of the BWP handover. For example, if the switching instruction information indicates that the time when the BWP switching is completed is 3 ms and the switching duration is 3 ms, the first terminal device starts the BWP switching at the time of 1 ms, and the BWP switching ends after the switching process continues for 3 ms, that is, the BWP switching at the time of 3 ms End.
  • the switching instruction information is also used to indicate the switching of M BWPs currently activated by the first terminal device, where M is a positive integer greater than 1.
  • the M BWPs include a side link BWP and a cellular link BWP.
  • the M BWPs may be on the same carrier or different carriers, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the first terminal device reports the following information to the network device: whether to support switching between the cellular link BWP and the side link BWP simultaneously; or whether to support switching between the cellular link BWP and the side simultaneously
  • the total number of downlink BWPs; and/or the number of simultaneous switching of the cellular link BWP and the simultaneous support of the lateral downlink BWP under the condition of supporting simultaneous switching of the switching cellular link BWP and the side link BWP The number of BWPs to be switched; or the switch delay or the type of switch delay and the side link to switch the BWP of the cellular link at the same time under the condition of supporting simultaneous switching of the BWP of the switching cellular link and the BWP of the side link BWP switching delay or switching delay type.
  • the first terminal device needs to first report to the network device whether to allow simultaneous switching of the cellular link BWP and the side link BWP. If not, the M BWPs are not performed. Simultaneous switching; if allowed, report the total number of simultaneous switching of the cellular link BWP and the side link BWP, such as N, where N is a positive integer less than or equal to M.
  • the number and type of cellular links BWP and the number and type of the side link BWP in the N simultaneous switched BWPs are reported at the same time, so as to determine the first switching duration and realize the N number including the cellular link BWP and the side link BWP Switch simultaneously.
  • the first terminal device switches from the first BWP to the second BWP according to the configuration information of the first BWP, the configuration information of the second BWP, and the switching instruction information in the configuration information.
  • the configuration information used is only the configuration information of the first BWP before switching and the configuration information of the second BWP after switching. According to the difference in the at least two connection states, the first terminal device switching from the first BWP to the second BWP may include different scenarios.
  • the configuration information of the first BWP and the configuration information of the second BWP in this application may come from the same message, or from different messages, or may come from different parts of the same message.
  • it can be sent to the terminal device through the same SIB or RRC message or pre-configured message, it can be sent to the terminal device through different SIB messages or different RRC messages or different or pre-configured messages, or it can be sent through a Different fields in the SIB message, an RRC message, or a pre-configured message or different parts of the message body are sent to the terminal device, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the first BWP is the BWP corresponding to the connected state
  • the second BWP is the BWP corresponding to the connected state
  • the first BWP is the BWP corresponding to the connected state
  • the second BWP is the BWP corresponding to the idle state
  • the first A BWP is a BWP corresponding to a connected state
  • the second BWP is a corresponding BWP outside the network
  • the first BWP is a BWP corresponding to an idle state
  • the second BWP is a BWP corresponding to a connected state
  • the first BWP is idle
  • the second BWP is the corresponding BWP outside the network
  • the first BWP is the corresponding BWP outside the network
  • the second BWP is the BWP corresponding to the connected state
  • the first BWP is the corresponding BWP outside the network.
  • the second BWP is the BWP corresponding to the idle state.
  • this step S405 may be that the first terminal device switches from the first BWP to the second according to the configuration information of the first BWP and the configuration information of the second BWP in the configuration information and the pre-configured switching conditions BWP.
  • the pre-configured switching condition is a correspondence between switching of the connection state of the first terminal device and BWP switching.
  • the pre-configured switching conditions may be pre-configured by the system, or pre-defined in the protocol, or may be reported to the network device when the connection state of the first terminal device is switched, and the network device receives the first It is configured after the information reported by a terminal device is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the system is pre-configured, which means that the communication-related parameters or configuration information are pre-configured into the communication terminal device in advance.
  • This method can usually be used in scenarios beyond network coverage, because the terminal device cannot connect to the network device at this time, and the configuration information can only be obtained in this way.
  • the information can be pre-configured by writing to the cache of the terminal device in advance.
  • the pre-configured switching condition includes: in a case where the first terminal device switches from a connected state to an idle state, the first terminal device switches from one BWP of at least one BWP corresponding to the connected state to the idle state A BWP corresponding to the state; or when the first terminal device switches from the idle state to the connected state, the first terminal device switches from a BWP corresponding to the idle state to one of at least one BWP corresponding to the connected state BWP; or in the case where the first terminal device is switched from the connected state to outside the network, the first terminal device is switched from a BWP corresponding to the connected state to one BWP of at least one BWP corresponding to the outside of the network; or When the first terminal device switches from the outside of the network to the connected state, the first terminal device switches from a BWP corresponding to the outside of the network to one BWP of at least one BWP corresponding to the connected state; or at the first terminal When the device switches from outside the network to the idle state, the first terminal
  • the communication system may pre-configure corresponding BWP switching conditions according to different state switching of the terminal device.
  • the correspondence between the pre-configured switching conditions shown in Table 2 and the state switching of the first terminal device is predefined.
  • connection state switching, identification and pre-configured switching conditions of the first terminal device there is a one-to-one correspondence between connection state switching, identification and pre-configured switching conditions of the first terminal device.
  • the pre-configuration switching condition 1 to the pre-configuration switching condition 6 sequentially correspond to the pre-configuration conditions listed above.
  • the pre-configured switching condition 1 is that the first terminal device switches from one of the at least one BWP corresponding to the connected state to a BWP corresponding to the idle state
  • the pre-configured condition 2 is that the first terminal device corresponds to the idle state from the idle state Switch a BWP to a BWP of at least one BWP corresponding to the connected state
  • pre-configured switching condition 6 is that the first terminal device switches from a BWP corresponding to the idle state to at least one BWP corresponding to the outside of the network One of the BWP.
  • the identification information corresponding to the state switch is fed back to the system according to the different state changes, and according to the identification information, the pre-configured switching conditions are determined by looking up Table 2. For example, when the first terminal device switches from the connected state to the idle state, the identification information 1 is fed back to the system. According to the correspondence between the pre-defined pre-configured switching conditions and the state switching of the first terminal device, the system determines the corresponding pre-configured switching conditions as condition 1 according to the identification information, then the first terminal device according to the corresponding pre-configured switching conditions, from One BWP of the at least one BWP corresponding to the connected state is switched to a BWP corresponding to the idle state.
  • the first terminal device starts random access from the idle state in the serving cell. If the random access process is successful, the connection state between the first terminal device and the network device changes from the idle state to the connected state. The terminal device switches from the first BWP corresponding to the idle state to the second BWP corresponding to the connected state. If the random access process fails, the connection state between the first terminal device and the network device is still in the idle state, and the first terminal device still works on the first BWP corresponding to the idle state, and BWP switching is not performed.
  • the above content mainly describes several scenarios where the first terminal device performs BWP switching.
  • the scenario where the first terminal device performs BWP switching may include at least one of the above.
  • the terminal devices in the same connection state can communicate normally, for example, communication between 10 terminal devices in a connected state or communication between 10 terminal devices in an idle state.
  • the communication between the terminal devices in different connection states will be affected, for example, the information sent by the terminal device in the connected state cannot be received by the terminal device in the idle state.
  • the configuration information may also include the configuration information and may also include the side of the terminal device in different connection states Time-frequency resources of the BWP of the link.
  • the configuration information may also include time-frequency resources of the side link BWP of the terminal device in different connection states.
  • the transmission time-frequency resource and the reception time-frequency resource of the terminal device are located in the side link BWP.
  • the reception time-frequency resource of the side link BWP for the terminal device in the connected state is A subset of the reception time-frequency resources of the side link BWP of the terminal device in the idle state; and/or the reception time-frequency resources of the side link BWP of the terminal device outside the network are used in the idle state A subset of the received time-frequency resources of the side link BWP of the terminal device; and/or the received time-frequency resources of the side link BWP of the terminal device in the connected state are the A subset of the side-link BWP reception time-frequency resources of the terminal device; and/or the side-link BWP reception time-frequency resource of the terminal device in the idle state is the terminal device used outside the network
  • the transmission time-frequency resource for the side link BWP of the terminal device in the idle state is the same as the transmission time-frequency resource for the connected state; and/or, the side of the terminal device in the idle state
  • the transmission time-frequency resource of the downlink BWP is the same as the transmission time-frequency resource used outside the network; and/or the transmission time-frequency resource of the side link BWP used for the terminal device outside the network is the same as that used in the connected state.
  • the transmission time-frequency resource is the same; and/or, the transmission time-frequency resource used for the side link BWP of the terminal device outside the network is the same as the transmission time-frequency resource used in the idle state.
  • the side link BWP in the connected state sends information on its corresponding transmission time-frequency resource.
  • the configuration information configures the 10 sides used for the connected terminal device
  • the reception time-frequency resource of the downlink BWP is 1MHz, and the 10 side-link BWP reception time-frequency resources of the terminal device in the idle state are 2MHz, that is, the side-link of the terminal device in the idle state
  • the BWP reception time-frequency resource may include a side link BWP reception time-frequency resource for the terminal device in the connected state, so that the information sent by the terminal device in the connected state can also be used by the terminal device in the idle state Received, it can realize normal communication between terminal devices in different connection states.
  • Steps S401 to S406 describe in detail the process of the first terminal device switching from the first BWP to the second BWP. After the BWP switching is completed, in order to further ensure that all BWP switching is completed at the same time, you can check whether all BWPs have completed the switching after the BWP switching is completed.
  • the first terminal device receives the first indication information sent by the network device.
  • the network device After the first terminal device switches from the first BWP to the second BWP, the network device sends first indication information to the first terminal device, where the first indication information is used by the first terminal device to determine the side link first BWP switching was successful.
  • the first indication information may include at least one of the following: indication information of the first BWP; indication information of the second BWP; and time interval information, wherein the time interval information indicates that the The interval between the start time or completion time of the handover of a BWP to the second BWP of the side link and the transmission time of the first indication information
  • the first indication information may be sent on the BWP before switching, or may be sent on the BWP after switching.
  • the first indication information is sent on the BWP before switching, if the terminal device receives the first indication information, it indicates that the terminal device has not successfully switched.
  • the first indication information is sent on the switched BWP, if the terminal device does not receive the first indication information, it indicates that the terminal device has not successfully switched. In this way, it can be determined whether the terminal device is successfully switched.
  • step S408 is also included, and the first terminal device sends second indication information to the network device.
  • the second indication information is used to determine that the first BWP handover is successful.
  • the second indication information includes any one of the following: indication information of the first BWP; indication information of the second BWP; indication of successful BWP handover.
  • the indication of the successful BWP switching in the second indication information is 1, it indicates that the first BWP switching is successful; or when the indication of the successful BWP switching is T, it indicates that the first BWP switching is successful.
  • the comparison is not limited.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic flowchart of a communication method 700 provided by an embodiment of the present application Figure.
  • the first terminal device obtains first switching instruction information sent by the network device, where the first switching instruction information is used to indicate the currently activated switching of M BWPs, where M is a positive integer greater than 1.
  • M BWP link types may be the same or different, for example, may be M side links, M cellular links, or M side links and cellular links This is not limited in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the currently activated M BWPs may be on the same carrier or different carriers, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the first terminal device performs BWP switching according to the first switching instruction information.
  • the first terminal device reports the following information to the network device: whether to support simultaneous switching of the cellular link BWP and the side link BWP; or to support simultaneous switching of the cellular link BWP and The total number of side link BWPs; and/or the number of simultaneous switching of the cellular link BWP and the side link BWP under the condition of supporting simultaneous switching of the switching cellular link BWP and the side link BWP The number of BWPs that are switched simultaneously in the medium; or the switch delay or the type of switch delay and the side row that support the switch of the cellular link BWP at the same time under the condition of supporting the simultaneous switching of the switching cellular link BWP and the side link BWP Switching delay or type of switching delay for link BWP.
  • the first terminal device needs to first report to the network device whether to allow simultaneous switching of the cellular link BWP and the side link BWP. If not, the M MWPs are not performed. Simultaneous BWP handover; if allowed, report the total number of BWP and sidelink BWP that support simultaneous handover of the cellular link, for example, N, where N is a positive integer less than or equal to M.
  • the number and type of cellular links BWP and the number and type of the side link BWP in the N simultaneous switched BWPs are reported at the same time, so as to determine the first switching duration and realize the N number including the cellular link BWP and the side link BWP Switch simultaneously.
  • the M BWPs may be on one carrier or on multiple carriers, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the terminal device reports the following information to the network device: whether it is supported to switch the BWP of the cellular link and the BWP of the side link at the same time; or The total number of BWPs supporting the simultaneous switching of the cellular link and the BWP of the side link; and/or under the conditions of supporting the simultaneous switching of the BWP of the changing cellular link and the BWP of the side link, supporting the cellular link.
  • the more than one BWP may be multiple BWPs of one type or multiple types of BWP. Whether it supports simultaneous switching of more than one BWP; or supports the switching delay or type of switching delay between the BWP of the cellular link and the BWP of the side link; or supports the switching delay of multiple BWPs of the same link or Switch the delay type.
  • the multiple BWPs indicating switching are of the same type, and when the reported information is 0, the multiple BWPs indicating switching are of multiple types; or, the reported information When it is 0, the multiple BWPs indicating the handover are of the same type, and when the reported information is 1, the multiple BWPs indicating the handover are of multiple types, which is not limited in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the reported information may include the number of BWPs that support simultaneous activation. For example, when the reported information indicates that multiple BWPs of the same type are activated at the same time, the reported information may also include the number of simultaneous activations of the same type of BWP; when the reported information indicates that multiple types of BWP are activated simultaneously In the case of multiple BWPs, the reported information may also include the number of simultaneous activations of the same type of BWP, where, when multiple types include cellular link BWP and side link BWP, the number is specifically The number of BWP of the cellular link and the number of BWP of the side link.
  • the first switching instruction information further includes switching duration information of multiple activated BWPs. Since the switching duration of the BWP is related to the types of the multiple BWPs, before the BWP switching is performed, the terminal device also needs to report the type of the BWP that supports simultaneous activation to the serving base station, and determine the switching duration of the BWP according to the BWP type.
  • the multiple BWPs are three BWPs, namely BWP1, BWP2, and BWP3, BWP1 and BWP2 are type1, and BWP3 is type2.
  • BWP1 and BWP2 are type1
  • BWP3 is type2.
  • the switching delay of BWP1 and BWP2 is 600us
  • the switching delay of BWP3 is 2000us.
  • the switching delay of 600 W for BWP1 and BWP2 is the switching time for switching BWP1, BWP2, and BWP3 at the same time
  • the switching delay of BWP1 and BWP2 is 2000us greater than 600us
  • BWP3 also If the switch is not completed, service interruption will be generated for BWP1 and BWP2 that have been switched over. Therefore, when instructing the switching duration, the maximum switching delay among the three BWPs should be selected as the switching duration of simultaneous switching, that is, the switching delay of 2000us for BWP3 is selected as the switching duration of BWP1, BWP2, and BWP3 simultaneous switching.
  • the switching duration is the maximum value of the switching delay reported by the pair of unicast terminals respectively; when the communication service is a multicast service, the switching duration is grouped for this group The maximum switching delay reported by the broadcast terminal devices respectively; when the communication service is a broadcast service, the switching delay is the maximum switching delay reported by all broadcast terminal devices.
  • the first handover indication information includes any one or more combinations of SIB, RRC, MAC CE or DCI to carry, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the first switching instruction information after receiving the first switching instruction information, multiple BWPs need to be switched at the same time.
  • the first switching instruction information needs to include the switching of each BWP in the multiple BWPs
  • the indication information before and the BWP indication information after switching enable the multiple BWPs to complete the switching accurately at the same time.
  • the first switching indication information includes indication information before BWP1 switching.
  • the indication information may be BWP1, and the corresponding indication information after switching is BWP3.
  • BWP2 The corresponding instruction information before switching is BWP2, and the instruction information after switching is BWP4.
  • BWP1 switches to BWP3 and BWP2 switches to BWP4.
  • the indication information of the pre-handover BWP included in the first handover indication information may be the frequency or time at which the multiple BWPs respectively work, and the corresponding handover
  • the indication information of the following BWP is the working frequency or time of the target BWP switched to.
  • the indication information of the BWP before handover and the indication information of the BWP after handover included in the first handover instruction information may also be other information with identification, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the first terminal device simultaneously performs switching of the currently activated M BWPs according to the acquired first switching instruction information, which reduces the number of other activated states during switching of a part of BWPs among multiple BWPs working simultaneously. Interruption caused by BWP improves communication reliability.
  • FIG. 8 shows a schematic flowchart of a communication method 800 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the first terminal device acquires configuration information of a timer corresponding to the first bandwidth part BWP of the side link.
  • the network device sends the configuration information of the timer corresponding to the first BWP of the side link to the first terminal device.
  • the first terminal device manages the timer according to the configuration information of the timer.
  • the first BWP of the side link is switched to the second BWP of the side link.
  • the first BWP of the side link is the BWP of the currently activated side link.
  • the second BWP is the BWP of the side link of the terminal device in the idle state or the BWP used for the side link outside the network.
  • the expiration of the timer means that the value of the timer exceeds the defined duration of the timer, where the duration of the timer may be pre-defined, signaling configured or pre-configured, embodiments of the present application There is no restriction on this.
  • the terminal device when the timer expires, if the terminal device is in the connected state, the terminal device sends to the network device indication information of the timer expiration or indication information of the terminal device side link BWP switching.
  • the network device receives the indication information, the side link first BWP is switched to the side link second BWP.
  • the terminal device at the receiving end manages the timer according to the configuration information of the timer by acquiring the configuration information of the timer.
  • managing the timer according to the timer configuration information includes timer start/restart, timer step increment by one, or timer expiration.
  • timer expires the BWP of the side link is switched. The influence of the disconnection of the terminal device of the receiving end on the communication quality during the communication is reduced, and the communication reliability is improved.
  • the configuration information of the timer may include the step size of the timer and/or the duration of the timer.
  • the step size of the timer and/or the duration of the timer are associated with at least one of the following parameters: the service type of the side link; the quality of service (QoS) parameter of the side link; the side Subcarrier spacing (SCS) value of the link; the resource pool used by the side link; the waveform type of the side link.
  • QoS quality of service
  • SCS side Subcarrier spacing
  • the timer step size and/or period setting are smaller, when the QoS requirements are low or the SCS is smaller, The timer step and/or period are set larger.
  • the time of the timer step may be included in the transmission resources of the side link.
  • the state of the timer also includes timer running, timer start/restart.
  • the first condition is any one of the following conditions: when the terminal device is in a connected state and successfully detects the DCI of the scheduling cellular link sent by the serving base station; when the terminal device successfully detects the scheduling sent by the first terminal device When the downlink control information of the side link is DCI; when the terminal device sends the buffer status of the side link, the scheduling request of the side link, and the hybrid automatic retransmission of the side link to the serving base station or the first terminal device once ( hybrid (automatic repeat request, HARQ) response message or channel state information CSI feedback information of the side link; when the terminal device successfully detects the SCI of the side link.
  • DCI downlink control information of the side link
  • the terminal device sends the buffer status of the side link, the scheduling request of the side link, and the hybrid automatic retransmission of the side link to the serving base station or the first terminal device once ( hybrid (automatic repeat request, HARQ) response message or channel state information CSI feedback information of the side link; when the terminal device successfully detects the SCI of the
  • the terminal device when the terminal device successfully receives the above control information, it may send an acknowledgement (ACK) information response message to the network device, and the timer is started or restarted.
  • ACK acknowledgement
  • the ACK information may be one or more.
  • the network device receives one ACK message from the terminal device; it may be that the network device receives multiple ACK messages from other terminal devices in a multicast or broadcast scenario.
  • the terminal device satisfies any one of the first conditions above, if the timer is not started, the timer is started; if the timer is started and has not expired, the timer restarts.
  • the terminal device when the terminal device successfully receives the above control information, it indicates that the current communication between the terminal device and the network device is normal, and the understanding about the scheduling information between the network device and the terminal device is consistent.
  • the value of the timer increases: downlink control of the scheduled cellular link sent by the network device When DCI information is used; when the downlink control information DCI for scheduling the side link sent by the network device is sent; when the ACK response information of the side link is used; when the side control information SCI of the side link is used.
  • the ACK response message that does not detect the side link may be DCI that does not detect the downlink control information of the scheduled cellular link sent by the network device, or the downlink control information of the scheduled side link sent by the access network During DCI, any one of the side control information SCI of the side link, the side link sends negative acknowledgement (negative acknowledgement, NACK) NACK response information, and the timer value increases. It may also be that the terminal device does not detect the ACK response message and the NACK response message, the terminal device sends discontinuous transmission (DTX) information to the network device, and the timer value increases.
  • DTX discontinuous transmission
  • the NACK information may be one or more.
  • the first terminal device receives one NACK message of the terminal device; it may be that the first terminal device receives multiple NACK messages in a multicast or broadcast scenario.
  • the terminal device when the terminal device successfully receives the above control information, it indicates that the current communication between the terminal device and the access network is abnormal, and the understanding about the scheduling information between the terminal device and the network device is inconsistent and may be in the network One of the terminal devices is offline or the BWP of the terminal device and the network device is different; or the terminal device is outside the network.
  • the ACK information or NACK information may be ACK or NACK feedback of hybrid automatic repeat HARQ, ACK or NACK feedback of automatic repeat ARQ, and so on.
  • whether to perform BWP switching of the side link can be determined according to the state of the timer.
  • the BWP switch of the side link needs to be performed.
  • the BWP switching of the side link may be that the terminal device switches from the first BWP of the side link in the connected state to the second BWP2 of the side link in the idle state; it may be the side of the terminal device from the idle state
  • the second BWP of the link is switched to the third BWP of the side link in the out-of-network state; the terminal device may also switch from the first BWP of the side link in the connected state to the side link in the out-of-network state.
  • the terminal device in the connected state reports to the first terminal device indication information that the timer expires or indication information that the terminal device is to switch the BWP of the side link.
  • the terminal device switches from the current side link BWP to a default BWP and restarts Access to the communication system to achieve transmission.
  • the default BWP is the BWP of the side link in the idle state.
  • the first terminal device has been sending data packets to the terminal device, but has not received any information and has not received it (such as ACK or NACK information), it indicates that there is a problem with the communication between the first terminal device and the terminal device, and needs to The adjustment is performed, and at this time, the value of the first timer increases.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of the communication device 10 provided by the present application.
  • the communication device 10 includes a transceiver unit 910 and a processing unit 920.
  • the communication apparatus 10 may be the first terminal device corresponding to the method 400.
  • the transceiving unit 910 is configured to execute the first terminal device acquiring configuration information of the bandwidth part BWP corresponding to at least two connection states sent by the network device.
  • the connection state is step S401 of the connection state between the terminal device and the network device.
  • the at least two connection states include an idle state, a connection state, or off-network, and the BWPs corresponding to the at least two connection states are used for side links.
  • the first BWP and the second BWP belong to BWP corresponding to at least two connection states respectively.
  • the transceiver unit 910 in the device 10 includes a receiving unit and a sending unit, and has both receiving and sending functions. It is used to perform the steps of acquiring, receiving, and sending information from other devices by the first terminal device in the method embodiment.
  • the transceiving unit 910 is further configured to perform a step S402 of sending the BWP handover delay type supported by the first terminal device to the network device.
  • the BWP handover delay type supported by the first terminal device should be sent to the network device before the first terminal device handover , Used to determine the switching duration.
  • the transceiving unit 910 is further configured to perform step S404 where the first terminal device receives the first handover duration sent by the network device.
  • the first switching duration is the maximum value of the switching delay corresponding to the BWP switching delay type supported by the first terminal device, so as to ensure that terminal devices communicating with each other can complete BWP switching at the same time.
  • the first terminal device does not send data within the time of the first handover duration after the start of handover until the end of the first handover duration.
  • the transceiving unit 910 is further configured to perform step S405 where the first terminal device acquires the switching instruction information.
  • the switching instruction information is used to instruct the first terminal device to switch from the first BWP to the second BWP.
  • the manner of acquiring the handover indication information is different.
  • the handover instruction information is sent by the network device to the first terminal device, and the first terminal device receives the handover instruction information from the network device.
  • the first terminal device cannot receive the information sent by the network device, and the first terminal device outside the network receives the switching instruction information from the second terminal device.
  • the second terminal device is a terminal device in the network, which is only used as an example here.
  • the handover indication information is also used to indicate at least one of the following information: the time when the handover starts; the time when the handover is completed, or the duration of the BWP handover; and the transmission resource on the second BWP.
  • the switching instruction information instructs the first terminal device to switch from the first BWP to the second BWP according to the instruction information.
  • the transceiving unit 910 is further configured to perform step S407 where the first terminal device receives the first indication information from the network device.
  • the transceiving unit 910 is further configured to perform step S408 where the first terminal device sends second indication information to the network device.
  • the first indication information and the second indication information are indication information used to determine that the first terminal device is successfully switched after the first terminal device switches from the first BWP to the second BWP.
  • the first indication information may include at least one of the following: indication information of the first BWP; indication information of the second BWP; and time interval information, wherein the time interval information indicates that the The interval between the start time or completion time of the handover of a BWP to the second BWP of the side link and the transmission time of the first indication information
  • the second indication information includes any one of the following: indication information of the first BWP; indication information of the second BWP; indication of successful BWP handover.
  • the transceiver unit 910 is also used to send the following information to the network device: whether to support switching between the cellular link BWP and the side link BWP simultaneously; or to support simultaneous The total number of handovers of the cellular link BWP and the side link BWP; and/or the number of simultaneous handovers of the cellular link BWP and The number of BWPs supporting simultaneous handover in the BWP of the side link; or the switch delay or handover of simultaneous switching of the BWP of the cellular link under the condition of supporting simultaneous switching of the switching cellular link BWP and the side link BWP The delay type and the switching delay or the switching delay type of the BWP of the side link.
  • the first terminal device needs to first report to the network device whether to allow simultaneous switching of the cellular link BWP and the side link BWP. If not, the M MWPs are not performed. Simultaneous BWP handover; if allowed, report the total number of BWP and sidelink BWP that support simultaneous handover of the cellular link, for example, N, where N is a positive integer less than or equal to M.
  • the number and type of cellular links BWP and the number and type of the side link BWP in the N simultaneous switched BWPs are reported at the same time, so as to determine the first switching duration and realize the N number including the cellular link BWP and the side link BWP Switch simultaneously.
  • the processing unit 920 executes steps internally implemented or processed in the first terminal device in the method embodiment.
  • the processing unit 920 is configured to perform step S406 of switching the first terminal device from the first BWP to the second BWP according to the configuration information of the first BWP, the configuration information of the second BWP, and the switching instruction information in the configuration information.
  • the processing unit is further configured to perform a step of the first terminal device switching from the first BWP to the second BWP according to the configuration information of the first BWP, the configuration information of the second BWP, and the pre-configured switching conditions in the configuration information.
  • the pre-configured switching condition is a correspondence between switching of the connection state of the first terminal device and BWP switching.
  • the pre-configured switching conditions may be pre-configured by the system, or pre-defined in the protocol, or may be reported to the network device when the connection state of the first terminal device is switched, and the network device receives the first It is configured after the information reported by a terminal device is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the configuration information of the first BWP and the configuration information of the second BWP in this application may come from the same message, or from different messages, or may come from different parts of the same message.
  • it can be sent to the terminal device through the same SIB or RRC message or pre-configured message, it can be sent to the terminal device through different SIB messages or different RRC messages or different or pre-configured messages, or it can be sent through a The SIB message or an RRC message or a pre-configured message in different fields or different parts of the message body are sent to the terminal device, this application does not limit this.
  • the communication apparatus 10 may be the first terminal device corresponding to the method 700.
  • the transceiving unit 910 is configured to perform step S710 where the first terminal device receives the first handover instruction information sent by the network device.
  • the first switching instruction information is used to indicate the currently activated switching of M BWPs, where M is a positive integer greater than 1.
  • M BWP link types may be the same or different, for example, may be M side links, M cellular links, or M side links and cellular links This is not limited in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the first handover indication information includes any one or more combinations of SIB, RRC, MAC CE or DCI to carry, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the processing unit 920 is configured to perform a step S720 of the first terminal device performing M BWP handovers according to the first handover instruction information.
  • the communication apparatus 10 may be the first terminal device corresponding to the method 800.
  • the transceiving unit 910 is configured to perform step S810 in which the first terminal device receives timer configuration information sent by the network device.
  • the processing unit 920 is configured to execute step S820 in which the first terminal device manages the timer according to the configuration information of the timer.
  • the first BWP of the side link is switched to the second BWP of the side link.
  • the first BWP of the side link is the BWP of the currently activated side link.
  • the second BWP is the BWP of the side link of the terminal device in the idle state or the BWP used for the side link outside the network.
  • the communication device 10 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device 10 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 10 may be a first terminal device 20, which performs the function of the first terminal device in the above method embodiment.
  • the first terminal device 20 includes a processor 210 and a transceiver 220.
  • the first terminal device 20 further includes a memory 230.
  • the processor 210, the transceiver 220 and the memory 230 can communicate with each other through an internal connection path to transfer control and/or data signals.
  • the memory 230 is used to store a computer program, and the processor 210 is used from the memory 230 Call and run the computer program to control the transceiver 220 to send and receive signals.
  • the first terminal device 20 may further include an antenna 240 for sending uplink data or uplink control signaling output by the transceiver 220 through a wireless signal.
  • the above processor 210 and the memory 230 may be combined into one processing device.
  • the processor 210 is used to execute the program code stored in the memory 230 to realize the above function.
  • the memory 230 may also be integrated in the processor 210 or independent of the processor 210.
  • the processor 210 may correspond to the processing unit of the communication device 10.
  • the transceiver 220 described above may correspond to the transceiver unit 910 in FIG. 9 and may also be referred to as a communication unit.
  • the transceiver 220 may include a receiver (or receiver, receiving circuit) and a transmitter (or transmitter, transmitting circuit). Among them, the receiver is used to receive signals, and the transmitter is used to transmit signals.
  • the terminal device 20 shown in FIG. 10 can implement various processes involving the first terminal device in the method embodiments shown in FIGS. 4, 7, and 8.
  • the operations and/or functions of each module in the first terminal device 20 are respectively for implementing the corresponding processes in the above method embodiments.
  • the above-mentioned processor 210 may be used to perform the actions described in the foregoing method embodiments and implemented internally by the first terminal device, and the transceiver 220 may be used to perform the first terminal device described in the foregoing method embodiment to send to or from the network device Action received by the network device.
  • the transceiver 220 may be used to perform the first terminal device described in the foregoing method embodiment to send to or from the network device Action received by the network device.
  • the first terminal device 20 may further include a power supply 250, which is used to provide power to various devices or circuits in the terminal device.
  • a power supply 250 which is used to provide power to various devices or circuits in the terminal device.
  • the first terminal device 20 may further include one or more of an input unit 260, a display unit 270, an audio circuit 280, a camera 290, a sensor 2100, etc.
  • the audio circuit may further include a speaker 282, a microphone 284, and the like.
  • the communication device 10 may also be the second terminal device or the third terminal device in any of the foregoing method embodiments, to implement the steps of the second terminal device or the third terminal device in any of the foregoing implementation manners Or function.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of the communication device 30 proposed by the present application. As shown in FIG. 11, the device 30 includes a processing unit 1110 and a transceiver unit 1120.
  • the communication device 30 may be a network device corresponding to the method 400.
  • the transceiver unit 1120 is configured to perform step S401 in which the network device sends configuration information of the bandwidth part BWP corresponding to at least two connection states to the first terminal device.
  • connection state is the connection state between the terminal device and the network device, including the connection state, out-of-network and idle state.
  • the BWPs corresponding to the at least two connection states are used for the side link.
  • the transceiver unit 1120 in the device 30 includes a receiving unit and a sending unit, and has both receiving and sending functions. It is used to perform the steps of obtaining, receiving, and sending information from other devices by the network device in the method embodiment.
  • the transceiving unit 1120 is configured to perform a step S402 where the network device receives the BWP handover delay type supported by the first terminal and sent by the first terminal device.
  • BWP handover delay types correspond to different BWP handover delays.
  • the network device should receive the first terminal device's support of the first terminal device before the first terminal device switches.
  • BWP handover delay type used to determine the handover duration.
  • the transceiver unit 1120 is further configured to perform step S404 where the network device sends the first switching duration to the first terminal device.
  • the first switching duration is the maximum value of the switching delay corresponding to the BWP switching delay type supported by the first terminal device, so as to ensure that terminal devices communicating with each other can complete BWP switching at the same time.
  • the first terminal device does not send data within the time of the first handover duration after the start of handover until the end of the first handover duration.
  • the transceiving unit 1120 is further configured to perform step S405 in which the network device sends switching instruction information to the first terminal device.
  • the switching instruction information is used to instruct the first terminal device to switch from the first BWP to the second BWP.
  • the handover instruction information is sent by the network device to the first terminal device, and the first terminal device receives the handover instruction information from the network device.
  • the handover indication information is also used to indicate at least one of the following information: the time when the handover starts; the time when the handover is completed, or the duration of the BWP handover; and the transmission resource on the second BWP.
  • the switching instruction information instructs the first terminal device to switch from the first BWP to the second BWP according to the instruction information.
  • the transceiving unit 1120 is further configured to send a pre-configured switching condition to the first terminal device, where the pre-configured switching condition is a correspondence between switching of the connection state of the first terminal device and BWP switching.
  • the pre-configured switching condition is a correspondence between switching of the connection state of the first terminal device and BWP switching.
  • the pre-configured switching conditions may be pre-configured by the system, or pre-defined in the protocol, or may be reported to the network device when the connection state of the first terminal device is switched, and the network device receives the first It is configured after the information reported by a terminal device is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the configuration information of the first BWP and the configuration information of the second BWP in this application may come from the same message, or from different messages, or may come from different parts of the same message.
  • it can be sent to the terminal device through the same SIB or RRC message or pre-configured message, it can be sent to the terminal device through different SIB messages or different RRC messages or different or pre-configured messages, or it can be sent through a The SIB message or an RRC message or a pre-configured message in different fields or different parts of the message body are sent to the terminal device, this application does not limit this.
  • the transceiver unit 1120 is further configured to perform step S407 in which the network device sends the first indication information to the first terminal device.
  • the transceiving unit 1120 is further configured to perform step S408 where the network device receives the second indication information sent by the first terminal device.
  • the first indication information and the second indication information are indication information used to determine that the first terminal device is successfully switched after the first terminal device switches from the first BWP to the second BWP.
  • the first indication information may include at least one of the following: indication information of the first BWP; indication information of the second BWP; and time interval information, wherein the time interval information indicates that the The interval between the start time or completion time of the handover of a BWP to the second BWP of the side link and the transmission time of the first indication information
  • the second indication information includes any one of the following: indication information of the first BWP; indication information of the second BWP; indication of successful BWP handover.
  • the transceiver unit 1120 is further configured to receive the following information sent by the first terminal device: whether it is supported to switch the cellular link BWP and the side link BWP at the same time; Or support the total number of simultaneous switching of the cellular link BWP and the side link BWP; and/or support the simultaneous switching of the cellular link BWP and the side link BWP under the condition of supporting simultaneous switching of the switching cellular link BWP and the side link BWP
  • the number of handovers and the number of BWPs supporting simultaneous handover in the BWP of the side link; or when the handover of the cellular link BWP is supported under the condition of supporting simultaneous switching of the switching cellular link BWP and the side link BWP Delay or handover delay type and the handover delay or handover delay type of the side link BWP.
  • the first terminal device needs to first report to the network device whether to allow simultaneous switching of the cellular link BWP and the side link BWP. If not, the M MWPs are not performed. Simultaneous BWP handover; if allowed, report the total number of BWP and sidelink BWP that support simultaneous handover of the cellular link, for example, N, where N is a positive integer less than or equal to M.
  • the number and type of cellular links BWP and the number and type of the side link BWP in the N simultaneous switched BWPs are reported at the same time, so as to determine the first switching duration and realize the N number including the cellular link BWP and the side link BWP Switch simultaneously.
  • the processing unit 1110 executes steps internally implemented or processed by the network device in the method embodiment.
  • the processing unit 1110 is configured to determine configuration information of the bandwidth part BWP corresponding to at least two connection states of the first terminal device, the connection state being a connection state between the terminal device and the network device, the at least two connection states Including the idle state, the connected state, or outside the network, the BWPs corresponding to the at least two connected states are used for the side link.
  • the processing unit 1110 is further configured to perform a step S403 where the network device determines the first switching duration according to the received BWP switching delay type supported by the first terminal device and sent by the first terminal device, where the first switching duration It is the maximum value of the BWP switching delay corresponding to the type of BWP switching delay supported by a pair of terminal devices or a group of terminal devices.
  • the communication apparatus 30 may be a network device corresponding to the method 700.
  • the transceiving unit 1120 is configured to perform step S710 in which the network device sends first switching instruction information to the first terminal device.
  • the first switching instruction information is used to indicate the currently activated switching of M BWPs, where M is a positive integer greater than 1.
  • M BWP link types may be the same or different, for example, may be M side links, M cellular links, or M side links and cellular links This is not limited in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the first handover indication information includes any one or more combinations of SIB, RRC, MAC CE or DCI to carry, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the processing unit 1110 is configured to perform a step in which the network device determines that the first terminal device determines the first handover instruction information.
  • the first switching instruction information is used to indicate the currently activated switching of M BWPs, where M is a positive integer greater than 1.
  • M BWP link types may be the same or different, for example, may be M side links, M cellular links, or M side links and cellular links This is not limited in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the currently activated M BWPs may be on the same carrier or different carriers, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 30 may be a network device corresponding to the method 800.
  • the transceiver unit 1120 is configured to perform step S810 in which the network device sends the configuration information of the timer to the first terminal device.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device 40 applicable to an embodiment of the present application, and may be used to implement the functions of the network device in the above-described communication method.
  • the network device 40 may include one or more radio frequency units, such as a remote radio unit (RRU) 401 and one or more baseband units (BBU).
  • the baseband unit may also be referred to as a digital unit (DU) 402.
  • the RRU 401 can be called a transceiver unit, which corresponds to the transceiver unit 1120 in FIG. 11.
  • the transceiver unit 401 may also be called a transceiver, a transceiver circuit, or a transceiver, etc., which may include at least one antenna 4011 and a radio frequency unit 4012.
  • the transceiving unit 1120 may include a receiving unit and a transmitting unit, the receiving unit may correspond to a receiver (or receiver, receiving circuit), and the transmitting unit may correspond to a transmitter (or transmitter, transmitting circuit).
  • the RRU 401 part is mainly used for the transmission and reception of radio frequency signals and the conversion of radio frequency signals and baseband signals, for example, for sending configuration information to the first terminal device.
  • the BBU 402 is mainly used for baseband processing and control of base stations.
  • the RRU 401 and BBU 402 may be physically set together, or may be physically separated, that is, distributed base stations.
  • the BBU 402 is the control center of the network device, and may also be called a processing unit, which may correspond to the processing unit 1110 in FIG. 11 and is mainly used to complete baseband processing functions, such as channel coding, multiplexing, modulation, and spread spectrum.
  • the BBU (processing unit) 402 may be used to control the network device 40 to perform the operation flow on the network device in the above method embodiment, for example, to determine the first switching duration.
  • the BBU 402 may be composed of one or more boards, and multiple boards may jointly support a wireless access network of a single access standard (eg, LTE system, or 5G system), or may support different Access standard wireless access network.
  • the BBU 402 also includes a memory 4021 and a processor 4022.
  • the memory 4021 is used to store necessary instructions and data.
  • the memory 4021 stores the codebook and the like in the above embodiment.
  • the processor 4022 is used to control the base station to perform necessary actions, for example, to control the network device to execute the operation flow on the network device in the above method embodiment.
  • the memory 4021 and the processor 4022 can serve one or more single boards. In other words, the memory and the processor can be set separately on each board. It is also possible that multiple boards share the same memory and processor. In addition, each board can also be provided with necessary circuits.
  • the network device 40 shown in FIG. 12 can implement the network device functions involved in the method embodiments of FIGS. 4, 7, and 8.
  • the operations and/or functions of each unit in the network device 40 are respectively for implementing the corresponding processes executed by the network device in the method embodiment of the present application. To avoid repetition, detailed description is omitted here as appropriate.
  • the structure of the network device illustrated in FIG. 12 is only one possible form, and should not constitute any limitation to the embodiments of the present application. This application does not exclude the possibility of other forms of network equipment structures that may appear in the future.
  • An embodiment of the present application further provides a communication system, which includes the foregoing network device and one or more terminal devices.
  • the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium, the computer-readable storage medium has instructions stored therein, and when the instructions run on the computer, the computer executes the method shown in FIG. 4, FIG. 7 and FIG. 8 Steps performed by the first terminal device in
  • the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium, the computer-readable storage medium has instructions stored therein, and when the instructions run on the computer, the computer executes the method shown in FIG. 4, FIG. 7 and FIG. 8 The steps performed by the network device in China.
  • the present application also provides a computer program product containing instructions, which, when the computer program product runs on a computer, causes the computer to perform the steps performed by the first terminal device in the methods shown in FIGS. 4, 7, and 8. .
  • the present application also provides a computer program product containing instructions.
  • the computer program product runs on a computer, the computer is allowed to perform various steps performed by the network device in the methods shown in FIGS. 4, 7, and 8.
  • the present application also provides a chip, including a processor.
  • the processor is used to read and run the computer program stored in the memory to perform the corresponding operation and/or process performed by the first terminal device in the communication method provided by the present application.
  • the chip further includes a memory, the memory and the processor are connected to the memory through a circuit or a wire, and the processor is used to read and execute the computer program in the memory.
  • the chip further includes a communication interface, and the processor is connected to the communication interface.
  • the communication interface is used to receive data and/or information that needs to be processed, and the processor obtains the data and/or information from the communication interface and processes the data and/or information.
  • the communication interface may be an input-output interface.
  • the present application also provides a chip, including a processor.
  • the processor is used to call and run the computer program stored in the memory to perform the corresponding operation and/or process performed by the network device in the communication method provided by the present application.
  • the chip further includes a memory, the memory and the processor are connected to the memory through a circuit or a wire, and the processor is used to read and execute the computer program in the memory.
  • the chip further includes a communication interface, and the processor is connected to the communication interface.
  • the communication interface is used to receive data and/or information that needs to be processed, and the processor obtains the data and/or information from the communication interface and processes the data and/or information.
  • the communication interface may be an input-output interface.
  • the processor may be a central processing unit (CPU), a microprocessor, an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), or one or more used to control the technology of the present application Integrated circuits for program execution.
  • the processor may be a digital signal processor device, a microprocessor device, an analog-to-digital converter, a digital-to-analog converter, or the like.
  • the processor may allocate the functions of control and signal processing of the terminal device or network device among these devices according to their respective functions.
  • the processor may have a function of operating one or more software programs, and the software programs may be stored in the memory. This function of the processor can be realized by hardware, or can also be realized by hardware executing corresponding software.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the above functions.
  • the memory may be read-only memory (ROM), other types of static storage devices that can store static information and instructions, random access memory (random access memory, RAM), or other types of information and instructions that can be stored
  • Dynamic storage devices can also be electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (electrically erasable programmable-read-only memory (EEPROM), read-only compact disc (compact disc read-only memory, CD-ROM) or other optical disc storage, optical disc storage ( (Including compact discs, laser discs, optical discs, digital versatile discs, Blu-ray discs, etc.), magnetic disk storage media, or other magnetic storage devices, or can be used to carry or store desired program code in the form of instructions or data structures and can Any other media accessed by the computer, etc.
  • EEPROM electrically erasable programmable read-only memory
  • compact disc compact disc read-only memory
  • CD-ROM compact disc read-only memory
  • optical disc storage including compact discs, laser discs, optical discs, digital versatile discs, Blu-ray discs
  • the memory and the memory involved in the foregoing embodiments may be physically independent units, or the memory may be integrated with the processor.
  • At least one refers to one or more, and “multiple” refers to two or more.
  • And/or describes the association relationship of the associated objects, indicating that there may be three relationships, for example, A and/or B, which may indicate the presence of A alone, A and B, and B alone. A and B can be singular or plural.
  • the character “/” generally indicates that the related object is a “or” relationship.
  • At least one of the following” and similar expressions refer to any combination of these items, including any combination of single items or plural items.
  • At least one of a, b, and c may represent: a, b, c, a-b, a-c, b-c, or a-b-c, where a, b, and c may be single or multiple.
  • the disclosed system, device, and method may be implemented in other ways.
  • the device embodiments described above are only schematic, for example, the division of units is only a logical function division, and there may be other division manners in actual implementation.
  • multiple units or components may be combined or integrated into another system, or some features may be ignored or not implemented.
  • the displayed or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical, or other forms.
  • the unit described as a separate component may not be physically separated, and the component displayed as the unit may not be a physical unit, that is, it may be located in one place, or may be distributed on multiple network units. Part or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the technical solution of the present application.
  • each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist alone physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • this function is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the technical solution of the present application essentially or part of the contribution to the existing technology or part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to enable a computer device (which may be a personal computer, server, or network device, etc.) to perform all or part of the steps of the method in various embodiments of the present application.
  • the foregoing storage media include: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (ROM), random access memory (RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk and other media that can store program codes .

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Quality & Reliability (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

The present application provides a communication method and device. The method comprises: a first terminal device acquires configuration information of a side link bandwidth part (BWP), the configuration information comprising configuration information of the side link BWP corresponding to a connection state, and the connection state being the connection state between a terminal device and a network device; and the first terminal device switches from a first side link BWP to a second side link BWP according to first configuration information and second configuration information in the configuration information, the first configuration information being the configuration information of the first side link BWP, and the second configuration information being the configuration information of the second side link BWP. The technical solution provided by the present application can reduce the interruption of communication caused by the switching of side link BWPs and improve the reliability of communication, and is applicable to Internet of vehicles such as V2X, LTE-V and V2V.

Description

一种通信方法和通信装置Communication method and communication device
本申请要求于2019年01月11日提交中国专利局、申请号为201910028787.5、申请名称为“一种通信方法和通信装置”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application requires the priority of the Chinese patent application filed on January 11, 2019 in the Chinese Patent Office with the application number 201910028787.5 and the application name as "a communication method and communication device", the entire contents of which are incorporated by reference in this application .
技术领域Technical field
本申请涉及通信领域,并且更具体地,涉及一种通信方法和通信装置。The present application relates to the field of communication, and more specifically, to a communication method and communication device.
背景技术Background technique
在第三代合作伙伴(3rd generation partnership project,3GPP)完成的5G NR系统中,引入了带宽部分(bandwidth part,BWP)的概念,使得终端设备可以在低带宽上运行,降低了终端设备的成本和功耗,使得5G系统在带宽的配置上更加灵活。In the 5G NR system completed by the 3rd generation partnership (3GPP), the concept of bandwidth (part of bandwidth) (BWP) was introduced to enable terminal equipment to run on low bandwidth and reduce the cost of terminal equipment And power consumption, make 5G system more flexible in the configuration of bandwidth.
终端设备在进行BWP切换时,需要基站(node base,NB)对终端设备进行BWP参数重配置,在参数重配置过程中,射频(radio frequency,RF)模块需要进行切换,会造成传输中断,对通信可靠性造成影响。When the terminal device performs BWP handover, the base station (node, base, NB) needs to reconfigure the BWP parameters of the terminal device. During the parameter reconfiguration process, the radio frequency (RF) module needs to be switched, which will cause transmission interruption. Communication reliability is affected.
因此,如何减小BWP切换对通信造成的中断影响,提高通信可靠性成为亟需解决的问题。Therefore, how to reduce the interruption effect of BWP switching on communication and improve communication reliability has become an urgent problem to be solved.
发明内容Summary of the invention
本申请提供了一种通信方法和通信装置,能够提高通信可靠性。The present application provides a communication method and a communication device, which can improve communication reliability.
第一方面,提供了一种通信的方法。第一方面提供的方法可以由第一终端设备执行,也可以由配置于第一终端设备中的芯片执行,本申请对此不做限定。In the first aspect, a method of communication is provided. The method provided in the first aspect may be executed by a first terminal device, or may be executed by a chip configured in the first terminal device, which is not limited in this application.
具体的,该方法包括:第一终端设备获取至少两种连接状态分别对应的带宽部分BWP的配置信息,该连接状态为终端设备与网络设备之间的连接状态,该至少两种连接状态包括空闲态、连接态或网络外,该至少两种连接状态分别对应的BWP用于侧行链路;该第一终端设备根据该配置信息中第一BWP的配置信息与第二BWP的配置信息,从该第一BWP切换到该第二BWP;其中,该第一BWP和该第二BWP属于该至少两种连接状态分别对应的BWP。Specifically, the method includes: the first terminal device obtains configuration information of the bandwidth part BWP corresponding to at least two connection states respectively, the connection state is a connection state between the terminal device and the network device, and the at least two connection states include idle State, connection state or outside the network, the BWPs corresponding to the at least two connection states are used for side links; the first terminal device according to the configuration information of the first BWP and the configuration information of the second BWP in the configuration information, from The first BWP is switched to the second BWP; wherein, the first BWP and the second BWP belong to the BWP corresponding to the at least two connection states respectively.
在第一方面提供的通信方法中,第一终端设备获取至少两种连接状态分别对应的带宽部分BWP的配置信息,并根据该配置信息中的第一BWP的配置信息和第二BWP的配置信息,从第一BWP切换至第二BWP,其中,该第一BWP和该第二BWP属于该至少两种连接状态分别对应的BWP。该方法使进行通信的终端设备进行同样的BWP切换,减小了BWP切换造成的通信中断,提高了通信可靠性。In the communication method provided in the first aspect, the first terminal device obtains configuration information of the bandwidth part BWP corresponding to at least two connection states respectively, and according to the configuration information of the first BWP configuration information and the second BWP configuration information , Switching from the first BWP to the second BWP, where the first BWP and the second BWP belong to the BWP corresponding to the at least two connection states respectively. This method enables the terminal devices performing communication to perform the same BWP switching, reduces the communication interruption caused by the BWP switching, and improves the communication reliability.
在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该至少两种连接状态分别对应的BWP包括:空闲态对应的一个BWP;和/或,网络外对应的至少一个BWP,和/或,连接态对应的至 少一个BWP。In a possible implementation manner of the first aspect, the BWPs corresponding to the at least two connection states include: one BWP corresponding to the idle state; and/or, at least one BWP corresponding to the outside of the network, and/or, the connection state Corresponding to at least one BWP.
在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,在该从第一BWP切换到第二BWP之前,该方法还包括:该第一终端设备从网络设备或第二终端设备接收切换指示信息,其中,该切换指示信息用于指示该第一终端设备从该第一BWP切换到该第二BWP;该从第一BWP切换到第二BWP,包括:该第一终端设备根据该配置信息中该第一BWP的配置信息与该第二BWP的配置信息,以及该切换指示信息,从该第一BWP切换到该第二BWP。In a possible implementation manner of the first aspect, before the handover from the first BWP to the second BWP, the method further includes: the first terminal device receives handover instruction information from the network device or the second terminal device, where , The switching instruction information is used to instruct the first terminal device to switch from the first BWP to the second BWP; the switching from the first BWP to the second BWP includes: the first terminal device according to the configuration information The configuration information of a BWP, the configuration information of the second BWP, and the switching instruction information are switched from the first BWP to the second BWP.
在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,当该第一终端设备处于连接态时,该第一终端设备从该网络设备接收该切换指示信息;或者,当该第一终端设备处于空闲态或网络外时,该第一终端设备从该第二终端设备接收该切换指示信息。In a possible implementation manner of the first aspect, when the first terminal device is in a connected state, the first terminal device receives the handover instruction information from the network device; or, when the first terminal device is in an idle state Or outside the network, the first terminal device receives the handover instruction information from the second terminal device.
在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,在该从第一BWP切换到第二BWP之前,该方法还包括:该第一终端设备向第三终端设备发送该切换指示信息。In a possible implementation manner of the first aspect, before the handover from the first BWP to the second BWP, the method further includes: the first terminal device sends the handover instruction information to the third terminal device.
例如,当进行BWP切换的一个终端设备处于网络外时,无法与网络设备进行通信,该终端设备接收不到网络设备发送的用于指示终端设备进行BWP切换的切换指示信息。为了实现多个BWP的同时切换,处于连接态的第一终端设备可以通过侧行链路向网络外的终端设备发送该切换指示信息,确保通信系统中通信的终端设备同时进行BWP切换,减小多个BWP切换造成的通信中断,提高通信可靠性。For example, when a terminal device performing BWP switching is outside the network, it cannot communicate with the network device, and the terminal device cannot receive the switching instruction information sent by the network device to instruct the terminal device to perform BWP switching. In order to realize the simultaneous switching of multiple BWPs, the connected first terminal device can send the switching instruction information to the terminal device outside the network through the side link to ensure that the terminal devices communicating in the communication system simultaneously switch BWP, reducing Communication interruption caused by multiple BWP handovers improves communication reliability.
在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该切换指示信息还用于指示以下信息中的至少一种:切换开始的时刻;切换完成的时刻,或者进行BWP切换的时长;在该第二BWP上的传输资源。In a possible implementation manner of the first aspect, the handover indication information is also used to indicate at least one of the following information: the time when the handover starts; the time when the handover is completed, or the duration of the BWP handover; in the second Transmission resources on BWP.
通过切换指示信息指示切换开始时刻,和/或切换完成时刻或者进行BWP切换的时长,接收到该切换指示信息的终端设备在同一时间段开始进行BWP切换,避免了多个BWP在不同时间切换造成通信多次中断。The switching start information is indicated by the switching instruction information, and/or the switching completion time or the duration of the BWP switching, the terminal device receiving the switching instruction information starts the BWP switching at the same time period, avoiding the switching caused by multiple BWPs at different times Communication was interrupted multiple times.
在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该第一终端设备根据该配置信息中第一BWP的配置信息与第二BWP的配置信息,从该第一BWP切换到该第二BWP,包括:该第一终端设备根据该配置信息中该第一BWP的配置信息与该第二BWP的配置信息,以及预配置切换条件从该第一BWP切换到该第二BWP;该预配置切换条件为该第一终端设备的连接状态的切换与BWP切换的对应关系。In a possible implementation manner of the first aspect, the first terminal device switches from the first BWP to the second BWP according to the configuration information of the first BWP and the configuration information of the second BWP in the configuration information, including : The first terminal device switches from the first BWP to the second BWP according to the configuration information of the first BWP and the configuration information of the second BWP in the configuration information, and the pre-configuration switching condition; the pre-configuration switching condition is Correspondence between the switching of the connection state of the first terminal device and the switching of BWP.
当第一终端设备与网络设备的连接状态发生变化时,比如,第一终端设备从网络外切换为空闲态时,该第一终端设备根据系统预配置的预配置切换条件进行BWP切换。When the connection state between the first terminal device and the network device changes, for example, when the first terminal device is switched from outside the network to the idle state, the first terminal device performs BWP switching according to the pre-configured switching conditions pre-configured by the system.
在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该预配置切换条件包括:在该第一终端设备从连接态切换到空闲态的情况下,该第一终端设备从该连接态对应的至少一个BWP中的一个BWP切换到该空闲态对应的一个BWP;或在该第一终端设备从空闲态切换到连接态的情况下,该第一终端设备从该空闲态对应的一个BWP切换到该连接态对应的至少一个BWP中的一个BWP;或在该第一终端设备从连接态切换到网络外的情况下,该第一终端设备从该连接态对应的一个BWP切换到该网络外对应的至少一个BWP中的一个BWP;或在该第一终端设备从网络外切换到连接态的情况下,该第一终端设备从该网络外对应的一个BWP切换到该连接态对应的至少一个BWP中的一个BWP;或在该第一终端设备从网络外切换到空闲态的情况下,该第一终端设备从该网络外对应的一个BWP切换到该空闲态对应的一个BWP;或在该第一终端设备从空闲态切换到网络外的情况下,该第一终 端设备从该空闲态对应的一个BWP切换到该网络外对应的至少一个BWP中的一个BWP。In a possible implementation manner of the first aspect, the pre-configured switching condition includes: in a case where the first terminal device switches from a connected state to an idle state, the first terminal device corresponds to at least one of the connected state A BWP in the BWP switches to a BWP corresponding to the idle state; or in the case where the first terminal device switches from the idle state to the connected state, the first terminal device switches from a BWP corresponding to the idle state to the connection One BWP of the at least one BWP corresponding to the state; or in the case where the first terminal device switches from the connected state to the outside of the network, the first terminal device switches from a BWP corresponding to the connected state to at least the corresponding outside the network A BWP in a BWP; or in the case where the first terminal device is switched from outside the network to the connected state, the first terminal device is switched from a corresponding BWP outside the network to at least one BWP corresponding to the connected state A BWP; or when the first terminal device is switched from outside the network to the idle state, the first terminal device is switched from a corresponding BWP outside the network to a BWP corresponding to the idle state; or at the first terminal When the device switches from the idle state to the outside of the network, the first terminal device switches from a BWP corresponding to the idle state to one BWP of at least one BWP corresponding to the outside of the network.
在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该配置信息包括该至少两种连接状态对应的BWP的时频资源,其中,该连接态对应的至少一个BWP的时频资源为该空闲态对应的BWP的时频资源的子集;和/或,该网络外对应的至少一个BWP的时频资源为该空闲态对应的BWP的时频资源的子集;和/或,该连接态对应的至少一个BWP的时频资源为该网络外对应的至少一个BWP的时频资源的子集;和/或,该空闲态对应的BWP的时频资源为该网络外对应的至少一个BWP的时频资源的子集。In a possible implementation manner of the first aspect, the configuration information includes time-frequency resources of the BWP corresponding to the at least two connection states, wherein the time-frequency resources of the at least one BWP corresponding to the connection state correspond to the idle state A subset of the time-frequency resources of the BWP; and/or, the corresponding time-frequency resources of at least one BWP outside the network is a subset of the time-frequency resources of the BWP corresponding to the idle state; and/or, the corresponding The time-frequency resource of at least one BWP is a subset of the time-frequency resource of at least one BWP corresponding to the outside of the network; and/or the time-frequency resource of the BWP corresponding to the idle state is the time-frequency of at least one BWP corresponding to the outside of the network A subset of resources.
该配置信息通过配置不同连接状态间时频资源的关系,使得在不同连接状态的终端设备之间也可以正常通信。The configuration information configures the relationship between time-frequency resources between different connection states, so that terminal devices in different connection states can also communicate normally.
在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,在该从第一BWP切换到第二BWP之前,该方法还包括:该第一终端设备向该网络设备发送该第一终端设备支持的BWP切换时延类型;其中,该第一终端设备支持的BWP的不同切换时延类型对应不同的BWP切换时延。In a possible implementation manner of the first aspect, before the handover from the first BWP to the second BWP, the method further includes: the first terminal device sends the BWP handover supported by the first terminal device to the network device Delay type; wherein, different switching delay types of BWP supported by the first terminal device correspond to different BWP switching delays.
不同BWP类型对应的切换时延不同。为了实现多个BWP同时切换,则终端设备进行BWP切换之前,需要向网络设备发送支持的BWP类型,用于确定切换时长。Different BWP types have different handover delays. In order to realize the simultaneous switching of multiple BWPs, the terminal device needs to send the supported BWP type to the network device to determine the switching duration before performing the BWP switching.
在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:该第一终端设备获取第一切换时长,其中该第一切换时长为一对终端设备或一组终端设备支持的BWP切换时延类型对应的BWP切换时延中的最大值;该第一终端设备在开始切换后的该第一切换时长的时间内不发送数据。In a possible implementation manner of the first aspect, the method further includes: the first terminal device obtains a first switching duration, where the first switching duration is a BWP switching duration supported by a pair of terminal devices or a group of terminal devices The maximum value of the BWP handover delay corresponding to the delay type; the first terminal device does not send data within the first handover time period after the start of handover.
网络设备在接收到终端设备发送的支持的BWP切换时延类型后,确定该BWP切换时延类型对应的切换时长的最大值为同时切换的时长,即第一切换时长。在该第一切换时长内,当某一个支持的BWP类型对应的切换时延小于该第一切换时长时,该终端设备在切换完成后,在第一切换时长结束之前不发送数据,避免其他与其通信的终端设备未切换完成,无法进行正常通信。After receiving the supported BWP switching delay type sent by the terminal device, the network device determines that the maximum value of the switching duration corresponding to the BWP switching delay type is the duration of simultaneous switching, that is, the first switching duration. Within the first handover duration, when the handover delay corresponding to a supported BWP type is less than the first handover duration, the terminal device does not send data after the handover is complete, and does not send data before the end of the first handover duration. The communication terminal device has not been switched, and normal communication cannot be performed.
在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:在从第一BWP切换到第二BWP之后,该第一终端设备接收第一指示信息,其中,该第一指示信息用于该第一终端设备确定该第一BWP切换成功。In a possible implementation manner of the first aspect, the method further includes: after switching from the first BWP to the second BWP, the first terminal device receives first indication information, where the first indication information is used for The first terminal device determines that the first BWP handover is successful.
在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该第一指示信息包括以下中的至少一种:该第一BWP的指示信息;该第二BWP的指示信息;时间间隔信息,该时间间隔信息指示从该第一BWP到该第二BWP的切换的开始时刻或完成时刻与该第一指示信息的传输时刻的间隔。In a possible implementation manner of the first aspect, the first indication information includes at least one of the following: indication information of the first BWP; indication information of the second BWP; time interval information, the time interval information Indicates the interval between the start time or completion time of the handover from the first BWP to the second BWP and the transmission time of the first indication information.
在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:在该从第一BWP切换到第二BWP之后,该第一终端设备发送第二指示信息,其中,该第二指示信息用于确定该第一BWP切换成功。In a possible implementation manner of the first aspect, the method further includes: after the handover from the first BWP to the second BWP, the first terminal device sends second indication information, where the second indication information is used It is determined that the first BWP handover is successful.
在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该第二指示信息包括以下中的至少一种:该第一BWP的指示信息;该第二BWP的指示信息;该BWP切换成功的指示。In a possible implementation manner of the first aspect, the second indication information includes at least one of the following: indication information of the first BWP; indication information of the second BWP; indication of successful BWP handover.
在第一终端设备从第一BWP切换到第二BWP后,为了确定该第一终端设备切换成功,该第一终端设备与网络设备可以互相发送指示信息,用于确定该第一终端设备切换成功。例如,网络设备向第一终端设备发送第一指示信息,或者,第一终端设备向网络设备发送第二指示信息。After the first terminal device is switched from the first BWP to the second BWP, in order to determine that the first terminal device is successfully switched, the first terminal device and the network device may send instruction information to each other to determine that the first terminal device is successfully switched . For example, the network device sends first indication information to the first terminal device, or the first terminal device sends second indication information to the network device.
在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该切换指示信息还用于指示当前激活的M个BWP同时切换,该M个BWP包括侧行链路的BWP和蜂窝链路的BWP,M为大于1的正整数。In a possible implementation manner of the first aspect, the handover indication information is also used to indicate that the currently activated M BWPs are switched at the same time. The M BWPs include the BWP of the side link and the BWP of the cellular link, where M is Positive integer greater than 1.
在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该侧行链路的BWP和该蜂窝链路的BWP在一个载波或多个载波上。In a possible implementation manner of the first aspect, the BWP of the side link and the BWP of the cellular link are on one carrier or multiple carriers.
在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:在当前激活的M个BWP同时切换之前,该第一终端设备向该网络设备发送以下信息:是否支持同时切换该蜂窝链路的BWP和该侧行链路的BWP;或支持同时切换该蜂窝链路的BWP和该侧行链路的BWP的总数量;和/或在支持同时切换该换蜂窝链路的BWP和该侧行链路的BWP条件下,支持该蜂窝链路BWP同时切换数量和支持该侧行链路的BWP中同时切换的BWP的数量;或在支持同时切换该换蜂窝链路的BWP和该侧行链路的BWP条件下,支持同时切换该蜂窝链路的BWP的切换时延或切换时延类型和该侧行链路的BWP的切换时延或切换时延类型。In a possible implementation manner of the first aspect, the method further includes: before the currently activated M BWPs are simultaneously switched, the first terminal device sends the following information to the network device: whether to support simultaneous switching of the cellular link The total number of BWP and BWP of the side link; or the total number of BWP that supports simultaneous switching of the cellular link and the BWP of the side link; and/or the simultaneous switching of the BWP of the cellular link and the side Under the condition of the BWP of the downlink, the number of simultaneous BWP handovers supported by the cellular link and the number of BWP simultaneously switched among the BWPs supporting the side link; or the BWP supporting the switching of the cellular link and the side line at the same time Under the BWP condition of the link, it supports simultaneous switching of the BWP switching delay or the switching delay type of the cellular link and the BWP switching delay or the switching delay type of the side link.
切换指示信息指示当前同时激活的蜂窝链路BWP和侧行链路BWP同时切换,避免了同时激活的BWP中由于切换时间不一致,而导致的部分BWP切换时,对其它工作的BWP造成通信中断。The handover instruction information indicates that the currently simultaneously activated cellular link BWP and the side link BWP are simultaneously switched, which avoids the interruption of communication to other working BWP when part of the BWP is switched due to the inconsistent switching time in the simultaneously activated BWP.
第二方面,提供了一种通信方法。第二方面提供的方法可以由第一终端设备执行,也可以由配置于第一终端设备中的芯片执行,本申请对此不做限定。In the second aspect, a communication method is provided. The method provided in the second aspect may be executed by a first terminal device, or may be executed by a chip configured in the first terminal device, which is not limited in this application.
具体的,该方法包括:第一终端设备获取第一切换指示信息,其中,该第一切换指示信息用于指示当前激活的M个带宽部分BWP的切换,M为大于1的正整数;该第一终端设备根据该第一切换指示信息进行BWP的切换。Specifically, the method includes: the first terminal device obtains first switching instruction information, where the first switching instruction information is used to indicate the currently activated switching of M bandwidth parts BWP, where M is a positive integer greater than 1; the first A terminal device performs BWP switching according to the first switching instruction information.
为了避免部分BWP切换对同时工作的其它BWP造成干扰,第一终端设备接收第一指示信息,指示同时激活的BWP同时进行切换。In order to avoid that some BWP switching causes interference to other BWPs working at the same time, the first terminal device receives the first indication information and instructs that the BWPs that are simultaneously activated are switched simultaneously.
在第二方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该当前激活的M个BWP的链路类型相同或不同,其中,该BWP的链路类型包括:蜂窝链路的BWP和侧行链路的BWP。In a possible implementation manner of the second aspect, the link types of the currently activated M BWPs are the same or different, where the link types of the BWP include: the BWP of the cellular link and the BWP of the side link .
在第二方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该第一切换指示信息包括以下中的任意一种:指示该当前激活的M个BWP中的N个BWP同时进行切换,其中N为不大于M的正整数;指示该当前激活的M个BWP中的N个BWP是否同时进行切换,其中N为不大于M的正整数;指示该当前激活的M个BWP中的N个BWP进行切换,其中N为不大于M的正整数;指示是否同时进行该蜂窝链路的BWP和该侧行链路的BWP切换的指示信息。In a possible implementation manner of the second aspect, the first handover indication information includes any one of the following: indicating that N BWPs of the currently activated M BWPs are simultaneously switched, where N is not greater than M A positive integer; indicates whether N BWPs of the currently activated M BWPs are switched simultaneously, where N is a positive integer not greater than M; indicates that N BWPs of the currently activated M BWPs are switched, where N It is a positive integer not greater than M; indication information indicating whether to switch the BWP of the cellular link and the BWP of the side link at the same time.
在第二方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该方法包括:在根据该第一切换指示信息进行BWP的切换之前,向网络设备上报以下信息:是否支持同时激活超过一个BWP;或支持同时激活的BWP数量;或是否支持同时激活该蜂窝链路的BWP和该侧行链路的BWP;或支持同时激活该蜂窝链路的BWP和该侧行链路的BWP的总数量;和/或在支持同时激活该蜂窝链路的BWP和该侧行链路的BWP的条件下,支持该蜂窝链路BWP同时激活的数量,和支持该侧行链路的BWP同时激活的数量;或是否支持同时切换该蜂窝链路的BWP和该侧行链路的BWP;或支持同时切换该蜂窝链路的BWP和该侧行链路的BWP的总数量;和/或在支持同时切换该换蜂窝链路的BWP和该侧行链路的BWP条件下,支持该蜂窝链路BWP同时切换数量和支持该侧行链路的BWP中同时切换的BWP的数量;或支持 同时切换该蜂窝链路的BWP和该侧行链路的BWP的切换时延或切换时延类型;或支持多个相同链路的BWP的切换时延或切换时延类型。In a possible implementation manner of the second aspect, the method includes: before performing BWP switching according to the first switching instruction information, reporting the following information to the network device: whether simultaneous activation of more than one BWP is supported; or simultaneous activation is supported The number of BWP; or whether it supports the simultaneous activation of the BWP of the cellular link and the BWP of the side link; or the total number of BWP that supports the simultaneous activation of the cellular link and the BWP of the side link; and/or Under the condition of supporting simultaneous activation of the BWP of the cellular link and the BWP of the side link, the number of simultaneous activations of the BWP of the cellular link and the number of simultaneous activations of the BWP supporting the side link; or whether it supports simultaneous Switching the BWP of the cellular link and the BWP of the side link; or the total number of BWPs supporting the switching of the cellular link and the BWP of the side link simultaneously; and/or supporting the switching of the switching cellular link simultaneously The number of BWPs that support the cellular link and the number of BWPs that can switch simultaneously in the BWP that supports the side link; or the BWP that supports the simultaneous switching of the cellular link The switching delay or switching delay type of the BWP of the side link; or the switching delay or switching delay type of the BWP supporting multiple same links.
在第二方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该第一切换指示信息通过SIB、RRC、MAC CE或DCI中的任意一种或多种来承载。In a possible implementation manner of the second aspect, the first handover indication information is carried by any one or more of SIB, RRC, MAC CE, or DCI.
在第二方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该M取值为2,N取值为1或2。In a possible implementation manner of the second aspect, the value of M is 2, and the value of N is 1 or 2.
本申请实施例中,同时进行切换的N个BWP可以为同种类型的BWP,例如N个BWP为N个蜂窝链路BWP或N个侧行链路BWP。也可以为不同类型的BWP,例如N个BWP包括蜂窝链路BWP和侧行链路BWP。本申请实施例对此不作限定。In the embodiment of the present application, the N BWPs that are switched simultaneously may be BWPs of the same type, for example, the N BWPs are N cellular link BWPs or N side link BWPs. It can also be a different type of BWP, for example, N BWPs include a cellular link BWP and a side link BWP. This embodiment of the present application does not limit this.
在第二方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该M个BWP在一个载波上或多个不同的载波上。In a possible implementation manner of the second aspect, the M BWPs are on one carrier or multiple different carriers.
在第二方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:在根据该第一切换指示信息进行BWP的切换之前,获取该蜂窝链路的BWP和/或该侧行链路的BWP的配置信息。In a possible implementation manner of the second aspect, the method further includes: before performing BWP handover according to the first handover instruction information, acquiring the BWP of the cellular link and/or the BWP of the side link Configuration information.
可选地,该配置信息可以由网络设备向终端设备发送。例如,网络设备通过配置的广播或组播的配置信令,向终端设备发送配置信息。该配置信令可以为SIB、RRC、MAC或者DCI中任意一种或者多种组合。Optionally, the configuration information may be sent by the network device to the terminal device. For example, the network device sends configuration information to the terminal device through configured broadcast or multicast configuration signaling. The configuration signaling may be any one or a combination of SIB, RRC, MAC or DCI.
第三方面,提供了一种通信方法。第三方面提供的方法可以由第一终端设备执行,也可以由配置于第一终端设备中的芯片执行,本申请对此不做限定。In a third aspect, a communication method is provided. The method provided in the third aspect may be executed by the first terminal device, or may be executed by a chip configured in the first terminal device, which is not limited in this application.
具体的,该方法包括:第一终端设备获取用于侧行链路第一带宽部分BWP对应的定时器的配置信息;该第一终端设备根据该定时器的配置信息,管理该定时器;若该定时器过期,从该侧行链路第一BWP切换到侧行链路第二BWP,其中该侧行链路第一BWP为当前激活的侧行链路的BWP,该侧行链路第二BWP为空闲态的终端设备的侧行链路的BWP或用于网络外的侧行链路的BWP。Specifically, the method includes: the first terminal device acquires configuration information of a timer corresponding to the first bandwidth part BWP of the side link; the first terminal device manages the timer according to the configuration information of the timer; When the timer expires, the first BWP of the side link is switched to the second BWP of the side link, where the first BWP of the side link is the BWP of the currently activated side link. The second BWP is the BWP of the side link of the terminal device in the idle state or the BWP used for the side link outside the network.
在第三方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该定时器过期是指该定时器的值超过了预定义、信令配置或预配置的定时器的持续时间。In a possible implementation manner of the third aspect, the timer expiration means that the value of the timer exceeds a predefined, signaling configuration, or pre-configured timer duration.
在第三方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该定时配置信息包括:定时器的步长和/或定时器的持续时间。In a possible implementation manner of the third aspect, the timing configuration information includes: the step size of the timer and/or the duration of the timer.
该配置信息通过配置该定时器的步长和/或定时器的持续时间,管理定时器。例如,当定时器的值超过预设的定时器值时,则定时器过期。The configuration information manages the timer by configuring the timer step size and/or timer duration. For example, when the value of the timer exceeds the preset timer value, the timer expires.
在第三方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该定时器步长和/或该定时器的持续时间与以下参数中的至少一种相关联:侧行链路的业务类型;侧行链路的服务质量参数;侧行链路的子载波间隔值;侧行链路所使用的资源池;侧行链路的波形类型。In a possible implementation manner of the third aspect, the timer step size and/or the timer duration is associated with at least one of the following parameters: the service type of the side link; the side link The quality of service parameters; the subcarrier spacing value of the side link; the resource pool used by the side link; the waveform type of the side link.
可以根据实际需求,适应性的配置定时器的步长和/或定时器的持续时间。例如,当侧行链路的服务质量要求较高时,该定时器的步长和/或定时器的持续时间设备的小一些。具体的参数根据实际需求而定。The step size of the timer and/or the duration of the timer can be adaptively configured according to actual needs. For example, when the quality of service of the side link is high, the step size of the timer and/or the duration of the timer are smaller. The specific parameters depend on the actual needs.
在第三方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:若满足第一条件,启动或重启该定时器。In a possible implementation manner of the third aspect, the method further includes: if the first condition is satisfied, starting or restarting the timer.
在满足第一条件时,如果当前定时器未启动,则此时定时器启动。当下一次满足第一条件时,该定时器重启。如果,满足第一条件时,该定时器已经启动,则该定时器重启。When the first condition is satisfied, if the current timer is not started, the timer is started at this time. When the first condition is met next time, the timer restarts. If, when the first condition is satisfied, the timer has been started, the timer is restarted.
在第三方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该第一条件包括以下条件中的任意一种:该终 端设备处于连接态且接收网络设备发送的调度蜂窝链路的下行控制信息;该终端设备检测到该网络设备发送的调度侧行链路的下行控制信息;该终端设备向该网络设备发送侧行链路的缓存状态、侧行链路的调度请求、侧行链路的HARQ应答消息或侧行链路的CSI反馈信息;该终端设备接收侧行链路的ACK的应答信息;该终端设备成功检测侧行链路的侧行控制信息SCI。In a possible implementation manner of the third aspect, the first condition includes any one of the following conditions: the terminal device is in a connected state and receives downlink control information for scheduling a cellular link sent by the network device; the terminal device The downlink control information for scheduling the side link sent by the network device is detected; the terminal device sends the buffer status of the side link, the scheduling request of the side link, the HARQ response message of the side link to the network device or The CSI feedback information of the side link; the terminal device receives the ACK response information of the side link; the terminal device successfully detects the side control information SCI of the side link.
在第三方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该管理该定时器包括:当该定时器正在运行且该定时器在对应步长的时间内未检测到以下信息中的任意一种时,增加该定时器的值:网络设备发送的调度蜂窝链路的下行控制信息时;网络设备发送的调度侧行链路的下行控制信息时;侧行链路的ACK应答信息时;侧行链路的侧行控制信息SCI时。In a possible implementation manner of the third aspect, the managing the timer includes: when the timer is running and the timer does not detect any of the following information within the corresponding step time, increase The value of this timer: when the network device sends downlink control information for scheduling the cellular link; when the network device sends downlink control information for scheduling the side link; when the side link ACK response information; when the side link When the side control information is SCI.
通过管理定时器,比较网络设备和终端设备的定时器值,确定网络设备和终端设备之间有关调度信息理解是否一致。若定时器值相同,则表示对于调度信息理解一致,通信正常;若定时器值不同,则表示对于调度信息理解不一致,网络设备和终端设备无法进行正常通信。By managing timers, the timer values of the network device and the terminal device are compared to determine whether the understanding of scheduling information between the network device and the terminal device is consistent. If the timer value is the same, it means that the understanding of the scheduling information is consistent and the communication is normal; if the timer value is different, it means that the understanding of the scheduling information is inconsistent and the network device and the terminal device cannot communicate normally.
在第三方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该定时器每个步长的时间根据侧行链路的传输资源预配置。In a possible implementation manner of the third aspect, the time of each step of the timer is pre-configured according to the transmission resource of the side link.
在第三方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:当该定时器过期时,处于连接态的该第一终端设备向网络设备发送该定时器过期的指示信息或该终端设备要进行侧行链路的BWP切换的指示信息。In a possible implementation manner of the third aspect, the method further includes: when the timer expires, the first terminal device in the connected state sends the network device an indication message that the timer expires or the terminal device wants Instruction information to perform BWP handover of the side link.
当定时器过期时,则表明终端设备和网络设备之间不能正常通信,因此要进行BWP切换。则第一终端设备向网络设备发送该定时器过期的指示信息,网络设备接收到该定时器过期的指示信息后,指示第一终端设备进行BWP切换,例如,网络设备向第一终端设备发送切换指示信息。When the timer expires, it indicates that the terminal device and the network device cannot communicate normally, so BWP switching is required. Then, the first terminal device sends the indication information that the timer expires to the network device, and after receiving the indication information that the timer expires, the network device instructs the first terminal device to perform a BWP switch, for example, the network device sends the switch to the first terminal device Instructions.
第四方面,提供了一种通信方法。第四方面提供的方法可以由网络设备执行,也可以由配置于网络设备中的芯片执行,本申请对此不做限定。In a fourth aspect, a communication method is provided. The method provided in the fourth aspect may be performed by a network device or a chip configured in the network device, which is not limited in this application.
具体的,该方法包括:网络设备确定第一终端设备至少两种连接状态分别对应的带宽部分BWP的配置信息,该连接状态为终端设备与网络设备之间的连接状态,该至少两种连接状态包括空闲态、连接态或网络外,该至少两种连接状态分别对应的BWP用于侧行链路;该网络设备向该第一终端设备发送该配置信息。Specifically, the method includes: the network device determines configuration information of the bandwidth part BWP corresponding to at least two connection states of the first terminal device, the connection state is a connection state between the terminal device and the network device, and the at least two connection states The BWP corresponding to the at least two connection states, including the idle state, the connected state, or outside the network, is used for the side link; the network device sends the configuration information to the first terminal device.
例如,网络设备通过配置的广播或组播的配置信令,向第一终端设备发送配置信息。该配置信令可以为SIB、RRC、MAC CE或者DCI中任意一种或多种组合。For example, the network device sends configuration information to the first terminal device through configured broadcast or multicast configuration signaling. The configuration signaling may be any one or a combination of SIB, RRC, MAC CE or DCI.
在第四方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该至少两种连接状态分别对应的BWP包括:空闲态对应的一个BWP;和/或,网络外对应的至少一个BWP,和/或,连接态对应的至少一个BWP。In a possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, the BWPs corresponding to the at least two connection states respectively include: one BWP corresponding to the idle state; and/or, at least one BWP corresponding to the outside of the network, and/or, the connection state Corresponding to at least one BWP.
在第四方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:当该第一终端设备处于连接态时,该网络设备向该第一终端设备发送切换指示信息,其中,该切换指示信息用于指示该第一终端设备从第一BWP切换到第二BWP。In a possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, the method further includes: when the first terminal device is in a connected state, the network device sends handover instruction information to the first terminal device, where the handover instruction information is used To instruct the first terminal device to switch from the first BWP to the second BWP.
例如,该第一BWP为连接态对应的BWP,该第二BWP为连接态对应的BWP;或该第一BWP为连接态对应的BWP,该第二BWP为空闲态对应的BWP;或该第一BWP为连接态对应的BWP,该第二BWP为网络外对应的BWP;或该第一BWP为空闲态对应的 BWP,该第二BWP为连接态对应的BWP;或该第一BWP为空闲态对应的BWP,该第二BWP为网络外对应的BWP;或该第一BWP为网络外对应的BWP,该第二BWP为连接态对应的BWP;或该第一BWP为网络外对应的BWP,该第二BWP为空闲态对应的BWP。For example, the first BWP is the BWP corresponding to the connected state, and the second BWP is the BWP corresponding to the connected state; or the first BWP is the BWP corresponding to the connected state, and the second BWP is the BWP corresponding to the idle state; or the first A BWP is a BWP corresponding to a connected state, the second BWP is a corresponding BWP outside the network; or the first BWP is a BWP corresponding to an idle state, and the second BWP is a BWP corresponding to a connected state; or the first BWP is idle The second BWP is the corresponding BWP outside the network; or the first BWP is the corresponding BWP outside the network; the second BWP is the BWP corresponding to the connected state; or the first BWP is the corresponding BWP outside the network. , The second BWP is the BWP corresponding to the idle state.
在第四方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该切换指示信息还用于指示以下信息中的至少一种:切换开始的时刻;切换完成的时刻,或者进行BWP切换的时长;在该第二BWP上的传输资源。In a possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, the handover indication information is also used to indicate at least one of the following information: the time when the handover starts; the time when the handover is completed, or the duration of the BWP handover; in the second Transmission resources on BWP.
在第四方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:该网络设备向第一终端设备发送预配置切换条件,该预配置切换条件为该第一终端设备的连接状态的切换与BWP切换的对应关系。In a possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, the method further includes: the network device sends a pre-configured switching condition to the first terminal device, where the pre-configured switching condition is the switching of the connection state of the first terminal device and the BWP Correspondence of switching.
在第四方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该预配置切换条件包括:在该第一终端设备从连接态切换到空闲态的情况下,该第一终端设备从该连接态对应的至少一个BWP中的一个BWP切换到该空闲态对应的一个BWP;或在该第一终端设备从空闲态切换到连接态的情况下,该第一终端设备从该空闲态对应的一个BWP切换到该连接态对应的至少一个BWP中的一个BWP;或在该第一终端设备从连接态切换到网络外的情况下,该第一终端设备从该连接态对应的一个BWP切换到该网络外对应的至少一个BWP中的一个BWP;或在该第一终端设备从网络外切换到连接态的情况下,该第一终端设备从该网络外对应的一个BWP切换到该连接态对应的至少一个BWP中的一个BWP;或在该第一终端设备从网络外切换到空闲态的情况下,该第一终端设备从该网络外对应的一个BWP切换到该空闲态对应的一个BWP;或在该第一终端设备从空闲态切换到网络外的情况下,该第一终端设备从该空闲态对应的一个BWP切换到该网络外对应的至少一个BWP中的一个BWP。In a possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, the pre-configured switching condition includes: in a case where the first terminal device switches from a connected state to an idle state, the first terminal device corresponds to at least one corresponding to the connected state A BWP in the BWP switches to a BWP corresponding to the idle state; or in the case where the first terminal device switches from the idle state to the connected state, the first terminal device switches from a BWP corresponding to the idle state to the connection One BWP of the at least one BWP corresponding to the state; or in the case where the first terminal device switches from the connected state to the outside of the network, the first terminal device switches from a BWP corresponding to the connected state to at least the corresponding outside the network A BWP in a BWP; or in the case where the first terminal device is switched from outside the network to the connected state, the first terminal device is switched from a corresponding BWP outside the network to at least one BWP corresponding to the connected state A BWP; or when the first terminal device is switched from outside the network to the idle state, the first terminal device is switched from a corresponding BWP outside the network to a BWP corresponding to the idle state; or at the first terminal When the device switches from the idle state to the outside of the network, the first terminal device switches from a BWP corresponding to the idle state to one BWP of at least one BWP corresponding to the outside of the network.
在第四方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该配置信息包括该至少两种连接状态对应的BWP的时频资源,其中,该连接态对应的至少一个BWP的时频资源为该空闲态对应的BWP的时频资源的子集;和/或,该网络外对应的至少一个BWP的时频资源为该空闲态对应的BWP的时频资源的子集;和/或,该连接态对应的至少一个BWP的时频资源为该网络外对应的至少一个BWP的时频资源的子集;和/或,该空闲态对应的BWP的时频资源为该网络外对应的至少一个BWP的时频资源的子集。In a possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, the configuration information includes time-frequency resources of the BWP corresponding to the at least two connection states, wherein the time-frequency resources of the at least one BWP corresponding to the connection state correspond to the idle state A subset of the time-frequency resources of the BWP; and/or, the corresponding time-frequency resources of at least one BWP outside the network is a subset of the time-frequency resources of the BWP corresponding to the idle state; and/or, the corresponding The time-frequency resource of at least one BWP is a subset of the time-frequency resource of at least one BWP corresponding to the outside of the network; and/or the time-frequency resource of the BWP corresponding to the idle state is the time-frequency of at least one BWP corresponding to the outside of the network A subset of resources.
在第四方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:该网络设备接收该第一终端设备发送的该第一终端设备支持的BWP切换时延类型;其中,该第一终端设备支持的BWP的不同切换时延类型对应不同的BWP切换时延。In a possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, the method further includes: the network device receiving the BWP handover delay type supported by the first terminal device and sent by the first terminal device; wherein, the first terminal device supports Different BWP switching delay types correspond to different BWP switching delays.
在第四方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:该网络设备向该第一终端设备发送第一切换时长,其中该第一切换时长为一对终端设备或一组终端设备支持的BWP切换时延类型对应的BWP切换时延中的最大值;该第一终端设备在开始切换后的该第一切换时长的时间内不发送数据。In a possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, the method further includes: the network device sends a first switching duration to the first terminal device, where the first switching duration is supported by a pair of terminal devices or a group of terminal devices The maximum value of the BWP switching delay corresponding to the type of BWP switching delay; the first terminal device does not send data within the time of the first switching duration after starting the switching.
在第四方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该第一指示信息包括以下中的至少一种:该第一BWP的指示信息;该第二BWP的指示信息;时间间隔信息,该时间间隔信息指示从该第一BWP到该第二BWP的切换的开始时刻或完成时刻与该第一指示信息的传输时刻的间隔。In a possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, the first indication information includes at least one of the following: indication information of the first BWP; indication information of the second BWP; time interval information, the time interval information Indicates the interval between the start time or completion time of the handover from the first BWP to the second BWP and the transmission time of the first indication information.
在第四方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:该网络设备接收该第一终端设 备发送的第二指示信息,其中,该第二指示信息用于确定该第一BWP切换成功。In a possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, the method further includes: the network device receives second indication information sent by the first terminal device, where the second indication information is used to determine that the first BWP handover is successful .
在第四方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该第二指示信息包括以下中的至少一种:该第一BWP的指示信息;该第二BWP的指示信息;该BWP切换成功的指示。In a possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, the second indication information includes at least one of the following: indication information of the first BWP; indication information of the second BWP; indication of successful BWP handover.
在第四方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该切换指示信息还用于指示当前激活的M个BWP同时切换,该M个BWP包括侧行链路的BWP和蜂窝链路的BWP,M为大于1的正整数。In a possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, the handover indication information is also used to instruct the currently activated M BWPs to switch simultaneously. The M BWPs include the BWP of the side link and the BWP of the cellular link, where M is Positive integer greater than 1.
在第四方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该侧行链路的BWP和该蜂窝链路的BWP在一个载波或多个载波上。In a possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, the BWP of the side link and the BWP of the cellular link are on one carrier or multiple carriers.
在第四方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:在该当前激活的M个BWP同时切换之前,该网络设备接收该第一终端设备发送的以下信息:是否支持同时切换该蜂窝链路的BWP和该侧行链路的BWP;或支持同时切换该蜂窝链路的BWP和该侧行链路的BWP的总数量;和/或在支持同时切换该换蜂窝链路的BWP和该侧行链路的BWP条件下,支持该蜂窝链路BWP同时切换数量和支持该侧行链路的BWP中同时切换的BWP的数量;或在支持同时切换该换蜂窝链路的BWP和该侧行链路的BWP条件下,支持同时切换该蜂窝链路的BWP的切换时延或切换时延类型和该侧行链路的BWP的切换时延或切换时延类型。In a possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, the method further includes: before the currently activated M BWPs are simultaneously switched, the network device receives the following information sent by the first terminal device: whether to support simultaneous switching of the cellular The BWP of the link and the BWP of the side link; or the total number of BWPs that support simultaneous switching of the cellular link and the BWP of the side link; and/or the BWP and Under the BWP condition of the side link, the number of simultaneous BWP handovers supported by the cellular link and the number of BWP simultaneously switched among the BWPs supporting the side link; or BWP and the Under the BWP condition of the side link, the switching delay or the switching delay type of the BWP of the cellular link and the switching delay or the switching delay type of the BWP of the side link are simultaneously supported.
第五方面,提供了一种通信方法。第五方面提供的方法可以由网络设备执行,也可以由配置于网络设备中的芯片执行,本申请对此不做限定。In a fifth aspect, a communication method is provided. The method provided in the fifth aspect may be performed by a network device or a chip configured in the network device, which is not limited in this application.
具体的,该方法包括:网络设备确定第一终端设备的第一切换指示信息,其中,该第一切换指示信息用于指示当前激活的M个带宽部分BWP的切换,M为大于1的正整数;该网络设备向该第一终端设备发送该第一切换指示信息。Specifically, the method includes: the network device determines first switching instruction information of the first terminal device, wherein the first switching instruction information is used to indicate the currently activated switching of M bandwidth parts BWP, where M is a positive integer greater than 1 The network device sends the first switching instruction information to the first terminal device.
在第五方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该当前激活的M个BWP的链路类型相同或不同,其中,该BWP的链路类型包括:蜂窝链路的BWP和侧行链路的BWP。In a possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect, the currently activated M BWPs have the same or different link types, where the BWP link types include: cellular link BWP and side link BWP .
在第五方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该第一切换指示信息包括以下中的任意一种:指示该当前激活的M个BWP中的N个BWP同时进行切换,其中N为不大于M的正整数;指示该当前激活的M个BWP中的N个BWP是否同时进行切换,其中N为不大于M的正整数;指示该当前激活的M个BWP中的N个BWP进行切换,其中N为不大于M的正整数;指示是否同时进行该蜂窝链路的BWP和该侧行链路的BWP切换的指示信息。In a possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect, the first switching indication information includes any one of the following: indicating that N BWPs of the currently activated M BWPs perform switching simultaneously, where N is not greater than M A positive integer; indicates whether N BWPs of the currently activated M BWPs are switched simultaneously, where N is a positive integer not greater than M; indicates that N BWPs of the currently activated M BWPs are switched, where N It is a positive integer not greater than M; indication information indicating whether to switch the BWP of the cellular link and the BWP of the side link at the same time.
在第五方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该方法包括:在该第一终端设备根据该第一切换指示信息进行BWP的切换之前,该网络设备接收该第一终端设备发送的以下信息:是否支持同时激活超过一个BWP;或支持同时激活的BWP数量;或是否支持同时激活该蜂窝链路的BWP和该侧行链路的BWP;或支持同时激活该蜂窝链路的BWP和该侧行链路的BWP的总数量;和/或在支持同时激活该蜂窝链路的BWP和该侧行链路的BWP的条件下,支持该蜂窝链路BWP同时激活的数量,和支持该侧行链路的BWP同时激活的数量;或是否支持同时切换该蜂窝链路的BWP和该侧行链路的BWP;或支持同时切换该蜂窝链路的BWP和该侧行链路的BWP的总数量;和/或在支持同时切换该换蜂窝链路的BWP和该侧行链路的BWP条件下,支持该蜂窝链路BWP同时切换数量和支持该侧行链路的BWP中同时切换的BWP的数量;或支持同时切换该蜂窝链路的BWP和该侧行链路的BWP的切换时延或切换时延类型;或支持多个相同链路的BWP的切换时延或切换时 延类型。In a possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect, the method includes: before the first terminal device performs BWP switching according to the first switching instruction information, the network device receives the following information sent by the first terminal device: Whether it supports simultaneous activation of more than one BWP; or the number of simultaneously activated BWP; or whether it supports simultaneous activation of the BWP of the cellular link and the BWP of the side link; or the simultaneous activation of the BWP of the cellular link and the side line The total number of BWPs of the link; and/or the number of simultaneous activations of the BWP of the cellular link and the support of the sidechain, provided that the BWP of the cellular link and the BWP of the sidelink are supported simultaneously The number of simultaneous BWP activations of the channel; or whether it supports the simultaneous switching of the BWP of the cellular link and the BWP of the side link; or the total number of simultaneous switching of the BWP of the cellular link and the BWP of the side link; And/or under the condition of supporting the simultaneous switching of the BWP of the switching cellular link and the BWP of the side link, the number of simultaneous switching of the BWP of the cellular link and the number of simultaneous switching of the BWP of the BWP supporting the side link ; Or support the switching delay or switching delay type of the BWP of the cellular link and the BWP of the side link at the same time; or support the switching delay or switching delay type of multiple BWPs of the same link.
在第五方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该第一切换指示信息通过SIB、RRC、MAC CE或DCI中的任意一种或多种来承载。In a possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect, the first handover indication information is carried by any one or more of SIB, RRC, MAC CE, or DCI.
在第五方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该M取值为2,N取值为1或2。In a possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect, the value of M is 2, and the value of N is 1 or 2.
在第五方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该M个BWP在一个载波上或多个不同的载波上。In a possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect, the M BWPs are on one carrier or multiple different carriers.
在第五方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:在根据该第一切换指示信息进行BWP的切换之前,获取该蜂窝链路的BWP和/或该侧行链路的BWP的配置信息。In a possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect, the method further includes: before performing BWP handover according to the first handover instruction information, acquiring the BWP of the cellular link and/or the BWP of the side link Configuration information.
第六方面,提供了一种通信方法。第六方面提供的方法可以由网络设备执行,也可以由配置于网络设备中的芯片执行,本申请对此不做限定。In the sixth aspect, a communication method is provided. The method provided in the sixth aspect may be performed by a network device or a chip configured in the network device, which is not limited in this application.
具体的,该方法包括:网络设备确定第一终端设备用于侧行链路第一带宽部分BWP对应的定时器的配置信息;该网络设备向该第一终端设备发送该配置信息。其中,该配置信息用于该第一终端设备管理该定时器。若该定时器过期,从该侧行链路第一BWP切换到第二侧行链路的BWP,其中该侧行链路第一BWP为当前激活的侧行链路的BWP,该第二侧行链路BWP为空闲态的终端设备的侧行链路的BWP或用于网络外的侧行链路的BWP。Specifically, the method includes: the network device determines the configuration information of the timer corresponding to the first bandwidth part BWP of the first terminal device; the network device sends the configuration information to the first terminal device. The configuration information is used by the first terminal device to manage the timer. If the timer expires, switch from the first BWP of the side link to the BWP of the second side link, where the first BWP of the side link is the BWP of the currently activated side link, and the second side The downlink BWP is the BWP of the side link of the terminal device in the idle state or the BWP of the side link used outside the network.
在第六方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该定时器过期是指该定时器的值超过了预定义、信令配置或预配置的定时器的持续时间。In a possible implementation manner of the sixth aspect, the timer expiration means that the value of the timer exceeds a predefined, signaling configuration, or pre-configured timer duration.
在第六方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该定时配置信息包括:定时器的步长和/或定时器的持续时间。In a possible implementation manner of the sixth aspect, the timing configuration information includes: the step size of the timer and/or the duration of the timer.
在第六方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该定时器步长和/或该定时器的持续时间与以下参数中的至少一种相关联:侧行链路的业务类型;侧行链路的服务质量参数;侧行链路的子载波间隔值;侧行链路所使用的资源池;侧行链路的波形类型。In a possible implementation manner of the sixth aspect, the timer step size and/or the timer duration is associated with at least one of the following parameters: service type of the side link; side link The quality of service parameters; the subcarrier spacing value of the side link; the resource pool used by the side link; the waveform type of the side link.
在第六方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该管理该定时器包括:当该定时器正在运行且该定时器在对应步长的时间内未检测到以下信息中的任意一种时,增加该定时器的值:网络设备发送的调度蜂窝链路的下行控制信息时;网络设备发送的调度侧行链路的下行控制信息时;侧行链路的ACK应答信息时;侧行链路的侧行控制信息SCI时。In a possible implementation manner of the sixth aspect, the managing the timer includes: when the timer is running and the timer does not detect any of the following information within the corresponding step time, increase The value of this timer: when the network device sends downlink control information for scheduling the cellular link; when the network device sends downlink control information for scheduling the side link; when the side link ACK response information; when the side link When the side control information is SCI.
在第六方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该定时器每个步长的时间根据侧行链路的传输资源预配置。In a possible implementation manner of the sixth aspect, the time of each step of the timer is pre-configured according to the transmission resource of the side link.
在第六方面的一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:当该定时器过期时,处于连接态的该第一终端设备向网络设备发送该定时器过期的指示信息或该终端设备要进行侧行链路的BWP切换的指示信息。In a possible implementation manner of the sixth aspect, the method further includes: when the timer expires, the first terminal device in the connected state sends the network device an indication message that the timer expires or the terminal device wants Instruction information to perform BWP handover of the side link.
第七方面,提供了一种通信装置。该通信装置可以用来执行第一方面及第一方面的任意可能的实现方式中的终端设备的操作,或者,用来执行第二方面及第二方面的任意可能的实现方式中的终端设备的操作,或者,用来执行第三方面及第三方面的任意可能的实现方式中的终端设备的操作,具体地,通信装置包括用于执行上述第一方面至第三方面中任一方面所描述的步骤或功能相对应的部件(means)。该步骤或功能可以通过软件实现,或硬件实现,或者通过硬件和软件结合来实现。In a seventh aspect, a communication device is provided. The communication apparatus may be used to perform the operation of the terminal device in the first aspect and any possible implementation manner of the first aspect, or to perform the operation of the terminal device in the second aspect and any possible implementation manner of the second aspect Operation, or used to perform the operation of the terminal device in the third aspect and any possible implementation manner of the third aspect, specifically, the communication apparatus includes the method described in any of the first aspect to the third aspect Corresponding to the steps or functions. This step or function can be implemented by software, or by hardware, or by a combination of hardware and software.
第八方面,提供了一种通信装置。该通信装置可以用来执行第四方面及第四方面的任 意可能的实现方式中的终端设备的操作,或者,用来执行第五方面及第五方面的任意可能的实现方式中的终端设备的操作,或者,用来执行第六方面及第六方面的任意可能的实现方式中的终端设备的操作,具体地,通信装置包括用于执行上述第四方面至第六方面中任一方面所描述的步骤或功能相对应的部件(means)。该步骤或功能可以通过软件实现,或硬件实现,或者通过硬件和软件结合来实现。In an eighth aspect, a communication device is provided. The communication apparatus may be used to perform the operation of the terminal device in the fourth aspect and any possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, or to perform the operation of the terminal device in the fifth aspect and any possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect Operation, or used to perform the operation of the terminal device in the sixth aspect and any possible implementation manner of the sixth aspect, specifically, the communication device includes the method described in any of the fourth aspect to the sixth aspect Corresponding to the steps or functions. This step or function can be implemented by software, or by hardware, or by a combination of hardware and software.
第九方面,提供了一种计算机程序产品,该计算机程序产品包括:计算机程序(也可以称为代码,或指令),当该计算机程序被运行时,使得计算机执行上述第一方面至第六方面中任一种可能实现方式中的通信方法。In a ninth aspect, a computer program product is provided. The computer program product includes: a computer program (also referred to as code or instructions) that, when the computer program is executed, causes the computer to perform the first to sixth aspects Any one of the possible implementation methods of communication.
第十方面,提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,该计算机可读存储介质存储有程序,该程序使得计算机中的服务器执行上述第一方面至第六方面及其各种实现方式中的任一种通信方法。According to a tenth aspect, there is provided a computer-readable storage medium that stores a program that causes a server in a computer to perform any one of the first to sixth aspects and various implementations thereof Kinds of communication methods.
或者说,该计算机可读存储介质用于储存为上述服务器所用的计算机软件指令,其包含用于执行上述第一方面至第六方面中任一种可能实现方式中任一种通信方法所设计的程序。In other words, the computer-readable storage medium is used to store computer software instructions for the above-mentioned server, which includes instructions designed to perform any of the communication methods in any possible implementation manner of any of the first to sixth aspects program.
第十一方面,提供了一种芯片系统,该芯片系统包括处理器,用于支持计算机中的服务器实现上述第一方面至第六方面及其各种实现方式中所涉及的功能。According to an eleventh aspect, a chip system is provided. The chip system includes a processor for supporting a server in a computer to implement the functions involved in the foregoing first to sixth aspects and various implementations thereof.
附图说明BRIEF DESCRIPTION
图1是D2D场景的示意图;Figure 1 is a schematic diagram of a D2D scene;
图2是V2X场景的示意图;Figure 2 is a schematic diagram of a V2X scene;
图3是本申请实施例的BWP重配置的四种场景的示意图;3 is a schematic diagram of four scenarios of BWP reconfiguration according to an embodiment of the present application;
图4是本申请一个实施例提供的通信方法的示意性流程图;4 is a schematic flowchart of a communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图5是利用侧行链路发送信息的场景示意图;FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of a scenario where a side link is used to send information;
图6是本申请一个实施例中提供的切换准备窗示意图;6 is a schematic diagram of a handover preparation window provided in an embodiment of the present application;
图7是本申请另一个实施例提供的通信方法的示意性流程图;7 is a schematic flowchart of a communication method provided by another embodiment of the present application;
图8是本申请又一个实施例提供的通信方法的示意性流程图;8 is a schematic flowchart of a communication method according to another embodiment of the present application;
图9是本申请一个实施例提供的通信装置的示意性框图;9 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图10是适用于本申请实施例的第一终端设备的结构示意图;10 is a schematic structural diagram of a first terminal device applicable to an embodiment of the present application;
图11是本申请另一个实施例的通信装置的示意性框图;11 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device according to another embodiment of the present application;
图12是适用于本申请实施例的网络设备的结构示意图。12 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
具体实施方式detailed description
下面将结合本申请实施例中的附图,对本申请实施例中的技术方案进行描述。The technical solutions in the embodiments of the present application will be described below with reference to the drawings in the embodiments of the present application.
本申请实施例的技术方案可以应用于各种场景下的终端设备与终端设备之间的通信。例如,设备间的通信(device to device,D2D)场景、车对外界的信息交换(vehicle to everything,V2X)场景、机器通信(machine type communication,MTC)/机器间通信(machine to machine,M2M)场景等。The technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application may be applied to communication between terminal devices and terminal devices in various scenarios. For example, device-to-device (D2D) scenarios, vehicle-to-outside information exchange (vehicle to everything, V2X) scenarios, machine communication (machine type communication (MTC)/machine-to-machine communication (M2M) Scenes, etc.
应说明,本申请实施例的技术方案也可以应用于各种场景下的服务基站与终端设备之间的通信,如蜂窝链路通信。为了便于描述,本申请实施例以侧行链路通信为例,但本申 请实施例并不仅限于此。It should be noted that the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application can also be applied to communication between the serving base station and terminal devices in various scenarios, such as cellular link communication. For ease of description, the embodiments of the present application take side link communication as an example, but the embodiments of the present application are not limited to this.
本申请实施例中的终端设备可以指用户设备、接入终端、用户单元、用户站、移动站、移动台、远方站、远程终端、移动设备、用户终端、终端、无线通信设备、用户代理或用户装置。终端设备还可以是蜂窝电话、无绳电话、会话启动协议(session initiation protocol,SIP)电话、无线本地环路(wireless local loop,WLL)站、个人数字助理(personal digital assistant,PDA)、具有无线通信功能的手持设备、计算设备或连接到无线调制解调器的其它处理设备、车载设备、可穿戴设备,未来5G网络中的终端设备或者未来演进的公用陆地移动通信网络(public land mobile network,PLMN)中的终端设备等,本申请实施例对此并不限定。The terminal device in the embodiments of the present application may refer to user equipment, access terminal, user unit, user station, mobile station, mobile station, remote station, remote terminal, mobile device, user terminal, terminal, wireless communication device, user agent or User device. Terminal devices can also be cellular phones, cordless phones, session initiation protocol (SIP) phones, wireless local loop (WLL) stations, personal digital assistants (personal digital assistants, PDAs), and wireless communication Functional handheld devices, computing devices or other processing devices connected to wireless modems, in-vehicle devices, wearable devices, terminal devices in future 5G networks or public land mobile communication networks (PLMN) in the future evolution The terminal device and the like are not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
为了方便理解本申请实施例的方案,首先对本申请涉及到的概念及相关技术进行描述。In order to facilitate understanding of the solutions of the embodiments of the present application, the concepts and related technologies involved in the present application are first described.
设备间的通信(device to device,D2D):为了提高频谱利用率及最大限度的利用现有终端设备的射频能力,D2D通信链路(称为侧行链路sidelink,SL)考虑复用现有移动通信网络的频谱资源。为了不干扰到现有网络的终端设备,D2D通信不使用高级长期演进(long term evolution-advanced,LTE-A)系统下行(downlink,DL)频谱资源,而只复用LTE-A系统的上行(uplink,UP)频谱资源,因为相对而言,基站的抗干扰能力比普通终端设备要好很多。D2D设备在该上行频谱资源时分复用的可能性较大,这样就不需要支持同时收发,在一个时刻只需要要么发送要么接收。在Rel-12/13版本中,D2D场景可以分为有网络覆盖、部分网络覆盖和没有网络覆盖3种,如图1所示。有网络覆盖的场景下D2D设备在网络设备的覆盖范围内;部分网络覆盖场景有一部分D2D设备在网络设备的覆盖范围内,另一部分D2D设备不在网络设备比的覆盖范围;没有网络覆盖的场景下,所有D2D设备都不在网络设备的覆盖范围。如果终端设备能听到网络设备的信号,为网络覆盖内终端设备;如果终端设备能听到网络覆盖内的其他终端设备的信号为部分网络覆盖终端设备;如果终端设备既收不到网络设备的信号,也收不到网络覆盖内的其他终端设备的信号,为网络覆盖外的终端设备。Communication between devices (device to device, D2D): In order to improve spectrum utilization and maximize the use of the RF capabilities of existing terminal equipment, D2D communication links (called sidelinks, sidelinks, SL) consider multiplexing existing Spectrum resources of mobile communication networks. In order not to interfere with the terminal equipment of the existing network, D2D communication does not use the downlink (DL) spectrum resources of the advanced long-term evolution (advanced-advanced, LTE-A) system, but only reuses the uplink (downlink, DL) spectrum resources of the LTE-A system. Uplink (UP) spectrum resources, because relatively speaking, the anti-interference ability of the base station is much better than ordinary terminal equipment. D2D devices are more likely to time-division multiplex the uplink spectrum resources, so that they do not need to support simultaneous transmission and reception, and only need to send or receive at a time. In the Rel-12/13 version, D2D scenarios can be divided into three types with network coverage, partial network coverage, and no network coverage, as shown in Figure 1. D2D devices are within the coverage of network devices in scenarios with network coverage; in some network coverage scenarios, some D2D devices are within the coverage of network devices, and other D2D devices are not in the coverage of network devices; in scenarios without network coverage , All D2D devices are not in the coverage of network devices. If the terminal equipment can hear the signal of the network equipment, it is the terminal equipment in the network coverage; if the terminal equipment can hear the signal of other terminal equipment in the network coverage, it is part of the network coverage terminal equipment; if the terminal equipment can not receive the network equipment The signal cannot receive the signal of other terminal equipment within the network coverage, and is the terminal equipment outside the network coverage.
车对外界的信息交换(vehicle to everything,V2X):在Rel-14/15/16版本,V2X作为D2D技术的一个主要应用顺利立项。V2X将在已有D2D技术的基础上对V2X的具体应用需求进行优化,需要进一步减少V2X设备的接入时延,解决资源冲突问题。V2X具体又包括车联网或者车车通信(vehicle to vehicle,V2V)、车与行人通信(vehicle to pedestrian,V2P)、汽车与基础设施通信或网络(vehicle to infrastructure/network,V2I/N)三种应用需求,如图2所示。具体地,V2V指的是基于长期演进(long term evolution,LTE)系统的车辆间通信;V2P指的是基于LTE的车辆与人(包括行人、骑自行车的人、司机、或乘客)的通信;V2I指的是基于LTE的车辆与路边装置(road side unit,RSU)的通信,另外还有一种V2N可以包括在V2I中,V2N指的是基于LTE的车辆与基站/网络的通信。路边装置包括两种类型:终端类型的RSU,由于布在路边,该终端类型的RSU处于非移动状态,不需要考虑移动性;基站类型的RSU,可以给与之通信的车辆提供定时同步及资源调度。Vehicle to outside information exchange (vehicle to everything, V2X): In the Rel-14/15/16 version, V2X as a major application of D2D technology was successfully established. V2X will optimize the specific application requirements of V2X on the basis of the existing D2D technology. It is necessary to further reduce the access delay of V2X equipment and solve the resource conflict problem. V2X includes vehicle networking or vehicle-to-vehicle (V2V), vehicle-to-pedestrian (V2P), vehicle-to-infrastructure communication or network (vehicle to infrastructure/network, V2I/N). Application requirements are shown in Figure 2. Specifically, V2V refers to inter-vehicle communication based on a long-term evolution (LTE) system; V2P refers to communication between LTE-based vehicles and people (including pedestrians, cyclists, drivers, or passengers); V2I refers to the communication between LTE-based vehicles and roadside units (RSUs). There is also a V2N that can be included in V2I. V2N refers to the communication between LTE-based vehicles and base stations/networks. There are two types of roadside devices: terminal-type RSUs. Because they are placed on the roadside, the terminal-type RSUs are in a non-mobile state and do not need to consider mobility; base station-type RSUs can provide timing synchronization to vehicles that communicate with them. And resource scheduling.
图3是可应用本申请实施例的四种可能的场景的示意图。在图3所示的坐标系里,纵轴为时间轴,单位为微秒(us),横轴为频率轴,单位为兆赫兹(MHz)。载波1和载波2为 两个不同的载波。应理解,本申请实施例仅以多个终端设备工作在两个载波上为例进行说明,在实际中,终端设备还可以工作在3个、5个等多个载波上,本申请实施例对此不作限定。FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of four possible scenarios to which embodiments of the present application can be applied. In the coordinate system shown in FIG. 3, the vertical axis is a time axis in microseconds (us), and the horizontal axis is a frequency axis in megahertz (MHz). Carrier 1 and carrier 2 are two different carriers. It should be understood that the embodiment of the present application only uses multiple terminal devices working on two carriers as an example for description. In practice, the terminal device may also work on multiple carriers such as 3, 5 and so on. This is not limited.
场景1:变换BWP的中心频点。对应图3中工作在载波1上的终端设备1,切换前工作的BWP带宽为100MHz,中心频点为50MHz,切换完之后工作的BWP中心频点变为150MHz,但BWP的带宽没有发生变化。Scenario 1: Changing the center frequency of BWP. Corresponding to the terminal device 1 operating on the carrier 1 in FIG. 3, the BWP bandwidth before switching is 100 MHz, and the center frequency is 50 MHz. The center frequency of the BWP after switching is 150 MHz, but the bandwidth of the BWP has not changed.
场景2:变换BWP的带宽,但不变换BWP的中心频点。对应图3中工作在载波2上的终端设备2,切换前工作的BWP带宽为100MHz,中心频点为100MHz,切换完之后工作的BWP带宽为200MHz,但中心频点未发生变换,仍然为100MHz。Scenario 2: The bandwidth of BWP is changed, but the center frequency of BWP is not changed. Corresponding to the terminal device 2 working on the carrier 2 in FIG. 3, the BWP bandwidth before switching is 100MHz, the center frequency is 100MHz, and the BWP bandwidth after switching is 200MHz, but the center frequency is not changed and is still 100MHz .
场景3:同时变换BWP的中心频点和带宽。对应图3中工作在载波1上的终端设备3,切换前工作的BWP带宽为200MHz,中心频点为100MHz,切换完之后工作的BWP带宽为100MHz,中心频点为350MHz,切换前后,工作的BWP带宽和中心频点均发生变换。Scenario 3: Simultaneously changing the center frequency and bandwidth of BWP. Corresponding to the terminal device 3 working on the carrier 1 in FIG. 3, the BWP bandwidth before switching is 200MHz, the center frequency is 100MHz, the BWP bandwidth after switching is 100MHz, and the center frequency is 350MHz. Before and after switching, the working Both the BWP bandwidth and the center frequency are changed.
场景4:不变换BWP的中心频点和带宽,只变换一些基带可配置的参数。对应图3中工作在载波2上的终端设备4,切换前工作的BWP带宽为100MHz,中心频点为350MHz,切换完之后工作的BWP带宽为100MHz,中心频点为350MHz,切换前后,工作的BWP带宽和中心频点均未发生变换,只变换基带的一些参数,比如子载波间隔(Subcarrier spacing,SCS)、循环前缀(Cyclic Prefix,CP)的类型等。Scenario 4: The center frequency and bandwidth of BWP are not changed, only some baseband configurable parameters are changed. Corresponding to the terminal device 4 working on the carrier 2 in FIG. 3, the BWP bandwidth before switching is 100MHz, the center frequency is 350MHz, the BWP bandwidth after switching is 100MHz, and the center frequency is 350MHz. Before and after switching, the working The BWP bandwidth and center frequency are not changed, only some of the baseband parameters are changed, such as the type of subcarrier spacing (SCS) and cyclic prefix (CP).
上述四种场景在不同的频率范围内进行BWP切换时,切换时延要求不同。目前,相应的频率范围分为频率范围1(Frequency Range 1,FR1)和频率范围2(Frequency Range 2,FR2),其中,FR1对应的频率小于6GHz,FR2对应的频率大于6GHz。表1示出了图3所示的四种不同的场景在不同频率范围内,BWP的切换时延参数。When the above four scenarios perform BWP switching in different frequency ranges, the switching delay requirements are different. At present, the corresponding frequency range is divided into frequency range 1 (Frequency Range1, FR1) and frequency range 2 (Frequency Range2, FR2), where the frequency corresponding to FR1 is less than 6 GHz, and the frequency corresponding to FR2 is greater than 6 GHz. Table 1 shows the switching delay parameters of BWP in four different scenarios shown in FIG. 3 in different frequency ranges.
表1 BWP切换时延参数Table 1 BWP switching delay parameters
Figure PCTCN2020071273-appb-000001
Figure PCTCN2020071273-appb-000001
表1中的类型1和类型2表示BWP的两种类型,不同的BWP类型对应的BWP切换时延不同,从表1中可以看出,对于同一个场景,类型2对应的BWP切换时延大于类型1对应的BWP切换时延。例如,场景1中,类型1对应的BWP切换时延为600us,类型2对应的BWP切换时延为2000us;场景4中,类型1对应的BWP切换时延为400us,类型2对应的BWP切换时延为950us。 Type 1 and type 2 in Table 1 represent the two types of BWP. Different BWP types correspond to different BWP switching delays. As can be seen from Table 1, for the same scenario, the type 2 corresponding BWP switching delay is greater than BWP switching delay corresponding to type 1. For example, in scenario 1, the BWP switching delay corresponding to type 1 is 600us, and the BWP switching delay corresponding to type 2 is 2000us; in scenario 4, the BWP switching delay corresponding to type 1 is 400us, and the BWP switching delay corresponding to type 2 The extension is 950us.
进一步从表1中可以看出,无论哪种场景下,哪种类型的BWP进行切换,都会产生一定的切换时延(最大2000us,最小400us)。当通信过程中存在多个终端设备进行BWP切换时,由于切换时间不一致,即使同时进行切换,但由于不同类型的BWP的切换时延不 同,当一部分终端设备完成BWP切换时,而另一部分终端设备未完成BWP切换,会造成通信传输的中断,对通信业务造成影响,降低了通信质量与可靠性。因此,在终端设备进行BWP切换时,要尽可能减少由于BWP的切换而导致的中断,降低BWP的切换对通信质量与可靠性的影响。It can be further seen from Table 1 that no matter what scenario and type of BWP is switched, there will be a certain switching delay (maximum 2000us, minimum 400us). When there are multiple terminal devices performing BWP switching during the communication process, due to the inconsistent switching time, even if the switching is performed at the same time, due to the different switching delay of different types of BWP, when some terminal devices complete the BWP switching, the other part of the terminal devices Failure to complete the BWP switch will cause the interruption of communication transmission, affect the communication service, and reduce the communication quality and reliability. Therefore, when the terminal device performs BWP handover, it is necessary to reduce the interruption caused by the BWP handover as much as possible, and reduce the impact of the BWP handover on the communication quality and reliability.
本申请实施例提供了一种通信方法,能够有效减少BWP切换而导致的通信中断,提高通信质量与可靠性。The embodiments of the present application provide a communication method, which can effectively reduce communication interruption caused by BWP switching and improve communication quality and reliability.
图4是本申请实施例提供的通信方法400的示意性流程图。该方法400包括S401至S408,其中,S402至S405、S407以及S408为可选的步骤。下面将详细介绍这些步骤。FIG. 4 is a schematic flowchart of a communication method 400 provided by an embodiment of the present application. The method 400 includes S401 to S408, where S402 to S405, S407, and S408 are optional steps. These steps will be described in detail below.
本申请实施例中,第一终端设备通过获取至少两种连接状态分别对应的BWP的配置信息,根据该配置信息中的第一BWP的配置信息以及第二BWP的配置信息,第一终端设备从第一BWP切换至第二BWP上,减少了第一终端设备在BWP切换时造成的通信中断,进而提高通信可靠性。In the embodiment of the present application, the first terminal device obtains the configuration information of the BWP corresponding to at least two connection states, and according to the configuration information of the first BWP and the configuration information of the second BWP in the configuration information, the first terminal device Switching the first BWP to the second BWP reduces communication interruption caused by the first terminal device during BWP switching, thereby improving communication reliability.
S401,第一终端设备获取至少两种连接状态分别对应的带宽部分BWP的配置信息。S401. The first terminal device obtains configuration information of the bandwidth part BWP corresponding to at least two connection states.
其中,该连接状态为终端设备与网络设备之间的连接状态,包括连接态、网络外和空闲态。该至少两种连接状态分别对应的BWP用于侧行链路。Among them, the connection state is the connection state between the terminal device and the network device, including the connection state, out-of-network and idle state. The BWPs corresponding to the at least two connection states are used for the side link.
应说明,为了便于描述,下文中未加说明的BWP均指侧行链路BWP。It should be noted that, for ease of description, the BWPs that are not explained below refer to the side link BWP.
本申请实施例提供的方法中,终端设备的不同连接状态分别对应相应的BWP,所以终端设备与网络设备的连接状态发生变化时,会存在BWP切换。比如,终端设备从连接态转为空闲态,或者从空闲态转为连接态,为了正常通信,该终端设备需要从连接态对应的一个BWP切换至空闲态对应的BWP。在终端设备进行BWP切换前,需要获取相应的配置信息,终端设备根据获取的配置信息进行相应的BWP切换。In the method provided in the embodiment of the present application, different connection states of the terminal device respectively correspond to corresponding BWPs, so when the connection state of the terminal device and the network device changes, there may be a BWP switch. For example, the terminal device changes from the connected state to the idle state, or from the idle state to the connected state. For normal communication, the terminal device needs to switch from a BWP corresponding to the connected state to a BWP corresponding to the idle state. Before the terminal device performs BWP switching, it is necessary to acquire corresponding configuration information, and the terminal device performs corresponding BWP switching according to the acquired configuration information.
可选地,终端设备连接状态变化不同,进行的BWP切换也不同。例如,终端设备在连接态对应的BWP与网络外对应的BWP间进行切换;和/或,终端设备在连接态对应的BWP与空闲态对应的BWP间进行切换;和/或,终端设备在网络外对应的BWP与空闲态对应的BWP间进行切换。Optionally, the connection state of the terminal device changes differently, and the BWP switching performed is also different. For example, the terminal device switches between the BWP corresponding to the connected state and the corresponding BWP outside the network; and/or, the terminal device switches between the BWP corresponding to the connected state and the BWP corresponding to the idle state; and/or, the terminal device is on the network Switch between the BWP corresponding to the external state and the BWP corresponding to the idle state.
可选地,至少两种连接状态分别对应的BWP可以为空闲态时对应的一个BWP和网络外对应的至少一个BWP;或者,空闲态对应的一个BWP和连接态对应的至少一个BWP;或者网络外对应的至少一个BWP和/或连接态对应的至少一个BWP。Optionally, the BWPs corresponding to the at least two connection states may be one BWP corresponding to the idle state and at least one BWP corresponding to the outside of the network; or, one BWP corresponding to the idle state and at least one BWP corresponding to the connected state; or the network At least one BWP corresponding to the external and/or at least one BWP corresponding to the connected state.
可选地,该配置信息可以由网络设备向第一终端设备发送。例如,网络设备通过配置的广播或组播的配置信令,向第一终端设备发送配置信息。该配置信令可以为系统消息块(system information block,SIB)、无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)、媒体访问控制(media access control,MAC)或者下行控制信号(download control signal,DCI)。Optionally, the configuration information may be sent by the network device to the first terminal device. For example, the network device sends configuration information to the first terminal device through configured broadcast or multicast configuration signaling. The configuration signaling may be a system message block (system information block, SIB), radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC), media access control (media access control, MAC), or a downlink control signal (download control signal, DCI).
S402,第一终端设备向网络设备发送该第一终端设备支持的BWP切换时延类型。S402. The first terminal device sends the BWP switching delay type supported by the first terminal device to the network device.
为了实现多个BWP的同时切换,减小由于BWP切换导致的通信中断,所以所有的BWP的切换需要在同时完成。由于切换时间与BWP的类型有关,如表1所示的BWP的类型不同,切换时延不同。因此,在进行BWP切换之前,进行BWP切换的终端设备向网络设备上报支持的BWP切换时延类型。In order to realize the simultaneous switching of multiple BWPs and reduce the communication interruption caused by BWP switching, all BWP switching needs to be completed at the same time. Since the switching time is related to the type of BWP, as shown in Table 1, the type of BWP is different, and the switching delay is different. Therefore, before performing BWP handover, the terminal device performing BWP handover reports the supported BWP handover delay type to the network device.
S403,网络设备确定第一切换时长。S403. The network device determines the first switching duration.
网络设备根据第一终端设备上报的支持的BWP切换时延类型,根据表1确定该终端 设备支持的BWP对应的切换时长。确定该第一终端设备上报的该第一终端设备支持的BWP切换时延类型中切换时延的最大值为第一切换时长。The network device determines the switching duration corresponding to the BWP supported by the terminal device according to Table 1 according to the supported BWP switching delay type reported by the first terminal device. It is determined that the maximum value of the switching delay in the BWP switching delay type supported by the first terminal device reported by the first terminal device is the first switching time.
例如,当通信业务为单播业务时,第一切换时长为这一对做单播的终端设备分别上报的切换时延中的最大值;当通信业务为组播业务时,切换时长为这一组做组播的终端设备分别上报的切换时延的最大值;当通信业务为广播业务时,切换时延为所有做广播的终端设备上报的切换时延的最大值。根据不同通信业务类型确定终端设备对应的BWP切换时延的最大值,确定该最大切换时延为进行BWP切换的第一切换时长,保证同时完成多个BWP切换,提升通信质量与可靠性。For example, when the communication service is a unicast service, the first handover duration is the maximum value of the handover delay reported by the pair of unicast terminals respectively; when the communication service is a multicast service, the handover duration is this The maximum value of the switching delay reported by the terminal devices that perform multicast respectively; when the communication service is a broadcast service, the switching delay is the maximum value of the switching delay reported by all terminal devices that perform broadcasting. The maximum value of the BWP switching delay corresponding to the terminal device is determined according to different communication service types, and the maximum switching delay is determined as the first switching duration for BWP switching, to ensure that multiple BWP switching is completed at the same time, and to improve communication quality and reliability.
可选地,第一终端设备从第一BWP切换至第二BWP时,通信系统可以根据现有的几种BWP的切换时延类型,预定义第一切换时长为所有类型的BWP对应的切换时延的最大值。此时,步骤S402与步骤S403可以不执行。Optionally, when the first terminal device switches from the first BWP to the second BWP, the communication system may pre-define the first switching duration to be the switching time corresponding to all types of BWP according to the existing types of switching delays of several BWPs The maximum value. At this time, steps S402 and S403 may not be executed.
例如,如表1所示的BWP切换时延参数,在频率范围1和频率范围2中,类型1的BWP和类型2的BWP切换时延最大值为2000us,则预定义的第一切换时长可以为2000us,进行BWP切换的终端设备在2000us的切换时长内都可以完成BWP切换。For example, as shown in Table 1 for the BWP switching delay parameters, in the frequency range 1 and the frequency range 2, the maximum value of the type 1 BWP and type 2 BWP switching delay is 2000us, then the predefined first switching duration can be For 2000us, the terminal device that performs BWP switching can complete the BWP switching within the switching duration of 2000us.
应说明,上述预定义第一切换时长的方法仅仅是为了举例说明,本申请实施例对此不作限定。It should be noted that the foregoing method for predefining the first switching duration is only for illustration, and this embodiment of the present application does not limit this.
S404,第一终端设备获取第一切换时长。S404. The first terminal device acquires the first switching duration.
网络设备根据第一终端设备上报的支持的BWP切换时延类型确定第一切换时长后将该第一切换时长发送给第一终端设备。The network device determines the first switching duration according to the supported BWP switching delay type reported by the first terminal device, and then sends the first switching duration to the first terminal device.
可选地,在BWP切换过程中,由于不同类型的BWP的切换时延不一样,为了保证多个BWP的同时切换,当第一终端设备从开始切换后的该第一切换时长的时间内不发送数据。Optionally, during the BWP handover process, since the handover delays of different types of BWP are different, in order to ensure the simultaneous handover of multiple BWPs, when the first terminal device does not change within the first handover time period after the start of handover send data.
例如,第一切换时长为5ms,第一终端设备在从侧行链路第一BWP切换至侧行链路第二BWP耗时为2ms,则在其余3ms中,第一终端设备不发送任何数据,直至该第一切换时长结束,即在该第一切换时长中,同时切换的BWP在同一时间内完成切换,避免了BWP切换造成多次通信终端,提高了通信可靠性。For example, the first handover duration is 5ms, and the first terminal device takes 2ms to switch from the first BWP of the side link to the second BWP of the side link. In the remaining 3ms, the first terminal device does not send any data. Until the end of the first handover duration, that is, during the first handover duration, the BWPs that are switched simultaneously complete the handover at the same time, avoiding multiple communication terminals caused by BWP handovers and improving communication reliability.
可选地,当通信系统预定义第一切换时长时,该步骤S404可以不执行。Optionally, when the communication system predefines the first switching duration, this step S404 may not be performed.
S405,第一终端设备获取BWP的切换指示信息。即第一终端设备从网络设备或第二终端设备接收切换指示信息,其中,所述切换指示信息用于指示所述第一终端设备从所述第一BWP切换到所述第二BWP。S405. The first terminal device obtains BWP switching instruction information. That is, the first terminal device receives switching instruction information from the network device or the second terminal device, where the switching instruction information is used to instruct the first terminal device to switch from the first BWP to the second BWP.
可选地,该第一终端设备在进行侧行链路BWP切换时,除了需要切换前的BWP的配置信息和切换后的BWP的配置信息,还需要在切换之前获取BWP的切换指示信息,该切换指示信息用于指示该第一终端设备进行BWP切换,例如从第一BWP切换至第二BWP。Optionally, when the first terminal device performs sidelink BWP switching, in addition to the configuration information of the BWP before the switching and the configuration information of the BWP after the switching, the switching instruction information of the BWP needs to be obtained before the switching. The switching instruction information is used to instruct the first terminal device to perform BWP switching, for example, switching from the first BWP to the second BWP.
可选地,第一终端设备处于不同连接状态时,获取该切换指示信息的方式不同。Optionally, when the first terminal device is in a different connection state, the manner of acquiring the handover indication information is different.
例如,当第一终端设备处于连接态时,该切换指示信息由该网络设备发送给第一终端设备,第一终端设备从网络设备接收切换指示信息。For example, when the first terminal device is in a connected state, the handover instruction information is sent by the network device to the first terminal device, and the first terminal device receives the handover instruction information from the network device.
可选地,当通信系统中存在多个终端设备时,其中一些终端设备处于网络外,在网络设备通过下行控制信号(download control signal,DCI)向终端设备发送该切换指示信息时, 由于处于网络外的终端设备无法与网络设备进行通信,无法接收该切换指示信息。此时,可以根据处于网络内的终端设备向网络外的终端设备通过侧行链路通信发送该切换指示信息。例如,当第一终端设备处于网络外时,第一终端设备从第二终端设备接收切换指示信息。需要理解的是,第二终端设备是某个处于网络内的终端设备,此处仅用于举例。Optionally, when there are multiple terminal devices in the communication system, some of which are outside the network, when the network device sends the handover instruction information to the terminal device through a downlink control signal (download control signal, DCI), because the terminal device is in the network The external terminal device cannot communicate with the network device and cannot receive the switching instruction information. At this time, the handover instruction information may be sent to the terminal device outside the network through the side link communication according to the terminal device in the network. For example, when the first terminal device is outside the network, the first terminal device receives the switching instruction information from the second terminal device. It should be understood that the second terminal device is a terminal device in the network, which is only used as an example here.
例如图5所示,网络设备下有3个终端设备,即第一终端设备、第二终端设备、第三终端设备。其中,第一终端设备在网络内,可以接收该网络设备通过DCI发送的切换指示信息,但处于网络外的第二终端设备和第三终端设备无法接收该网络设备通过DCI发送的切换指示信息,则该第一终端设备通过侧行链路控制信息(sidelink control signal,SCI)向第二终端设备和第三终端设备发送接收到的该网络设备通过DCI发送的切换指示信息。比如,第一终端设备向第二终端设备发送切换指示信息。For example, as shown in FIG. 5, there are three terminal devices under the network device, namely a first terminal device, a second terminal device, and a third terminal device. The first terminal device is in the network and can receive the switching instruction information sent by the network device through DCI, but the second terminal device and the third terminal device outside the network cannot receive the switching instruction information sent by the network device through DCI, Then, the first terminal device sends the received handover instruction information sent by the network device through DCI to the second terminal device and the third terminal device through sidelink control information (sidelink control signal, SCI). For example, the first terminal device sends switching instruction information to the second terminal device.
可选地,该切换指示信息可以指示单播中的第一终端设备和第二终端设备的BWP切换,或者该切换指示信息可以指示组播或广播中的多个终端设备的BWP切换,其中该多个终端设备包括第一终端设备。Optionally, the switching instruction information may indicate BWP switching of the first terminal device and the second terminal device in unicast, or the switching instruction information may indicate BWP switching of multiple terminal devices in multicast or broadcast, wherein the The multiple terminal devices include the first terminal device.
可选地,该第一终端设备还可以在一个切换准备窗内接收该切换指示信息,在该切换准备窗内,网络设备多次发送该切换指示信息,使该多个终端设备在切换开始前都接收到该切换指示信息。Optionally, the first terminal device may also receive the handover instruction information within a handover preparation window, and within the handover preparation window, the network device sends the handover instruction information multiple times to enable the multiple terminal devices before the handover begins Both received the switching instruction information.
可选地,处于网络外的第一终端设备可以在一个切换准备窗内接收该切换指示信息,在该切换准备窗内,处于网络内的第二终端设备多次发送该切换指示信息,使该第一终端设备在切换开始前接收到该切换指示信息。Optionally, the first terminal device outside the network may receive the handover instruction information within a handover preparation window, and within the handover preparation window, the second terminal device within the network sends the handover instruction information multiple times to make the The first terminal device receives the switching instruction information before starting the switching.
可选的,该切换指示信息包括该切换准备窗的配置信息,该切换窗的配置信息包括以下至少一种:切换准备窗时长的配置信息;切换准备窗开始时间的配置信息;切换准备窗结束时间的配置信息。Optionally, the switching instruction information includes configuration information of the switching preparation window, and the configuration information of the switching window includes at least one of the following: configuration information of the duration of the switching preparation window; configuration information of the start time of the switching preparation window; end of the switching preparation window Time configuration information.
应理解,该切换准备窗的配置信息还可以在该切换指示信息之前发送,本申请实施例对此并不作限定。如图6所示的,第一终端设备工作在BWP1上,切换指示信息指示该第一终端设备从该BWP1上切换至BWP2上。为了让通信的终端设备都能可靠地接收切换指示信息,避免因漏检DCI而不能同时做BWP切换,网络设备需要向网络内进行BWP切换的终端设备多次发送DCI消息,如图6中5个切换准备窗中分别发送DCI消息,该网络设备多次发送的DCI消息可以为同样的内容也可以内容不同,本申请实施例对此不作限定。It should be understood that the configuration information of the handover preparation window may also be sent before the handover instruction information, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 6, the first terminal device works on BWP1, and the handover instruction information instructs the first terminal device to switch from BWP1 to BWP2. In order for the communicating terminal devices to reliably receive the switching instruction information and avoid failing to detect the DCI at the same time, they cannot do BWP switching at the same time. The network device needs to send the DCI message to the terminal device that performs BWP switching multiple times in the network, as shown in Figure 6 5 DCI messages are sent separately in each handover preparation window. The DCI messages sent by the network device multiple times may have the same content or different content, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
可选地,该切换指示信息还用于指示以下信息中的至少一种:切换开始的时刻;切换完成的时刻,或者进行BWP切换的时长;在第二BWP上的传输资源。Optionally, the handover indication information is also used to indicate at least one of the following information: the time when the handover starts; the time when the handover is completed, or the duration of the BWP handover; and the transmission resource on the second BWP.
该切换指示信息指示第一终端设备根据该指示信息从第一BWP切换至第二BWP。The switching instruction information instructs the first terminal device to switch from the first BWP to the second BWP according to the instruction information.
例如,第一终端设备成功检测到触发BWP切换的RNTI对应的PDCCH,该第一终端设备从连接态对应的第一BWP切换至连接态对应的第二BWP。For example, the first terminal device successfully detects the PDCCH corresponding to the RNTI that triggers the BWP switching, and the first terminal device switches from the first BWP corresponding to the connected state to the second BWP corresponding to the connected state.
可选地,该切换指示信息通过指示切换开始的时刻和切换完成的时刻,即该第一终端设备从何时开始进行BWP切换,到何时停止BWP切换。例如,该切换指示信息指示开始时刻为1ms,切换完成时刻为3ms,则第一终端设备在1ms时刻开始进行BWP切换,在3ms时刻BWP切换结束。Optionally, the handover instruction information indicates the time when the handover starts and the time when the handover is completed, that is, when the first terminal device starts BWP handover and when it stops BWP handover. For example, if the switching instruction information indicates that the start time is 1 ms and the switching completion time is 3 ms, the first terminal device starts BWP switching at 1 ms, and the BWP switching ends at 3 ms.
可选地,该切换指示信息还可以指示切换开始的时刻和进行BWP切换的时长。例如, 该切换指示信息指示BWP切换开始的时刻为1ms,切换时长为3ms,则该第一终端设备在1ms时刻开始进行BWP切换,切换过程持续3ms后BWP切换结束,即在3ms时刻时BWP切换结束。Optionally, the handover instruction information may also indicate the time when the handover starts and the duration of the BWP handover. For example, if the switching instruction information indicates that the BWP switching start time is 1 ms and the switching duration is 3 ms, the first terminal device starts BWP switching at the 1 ms time, and the BWP switching ends after the switching process continues for 3 ms, that is, the BWP switching at the 3 ms time End.
可选地,该切换指示信息还可以指示切换完成的时刻和进行BWP切换的时长。例如,该切换指示信息指示BWP切换完成的时刻为3ms,切换时长为3ms,则该第一终端设备在1ms时刻开始进行BWP切换,切换过程持续3ms后BWP切换结束,即在3ms时刻时BWP切换结束。Optionally, the handover instruction information may also indicate the time when the handover is completed and the duration of the BWP handover. For example, if the switching instruction information indicates that the time when the BWP switching is completed is 3 ms and the switching duration is 3 ms, the first terminal device starts the BWP switching at the time of 1 ms, and the BWP switching ends after the switching process continues for 3 ms, that is, the BWP switching at the time of 3 ms End.
可选地,该切换指示信息还用于指示第一终端设备当前激活的M个BWP的切换,M为大于1的正整数。Optionally, the switching instruction information is also used to indicate the switching of M BWPs currently activated by the first terminal device, where M is a positive integer greater than 1.
可选地,该M个BWP包括侧行链路BWP和蜂窝链路BWP。Optionally, the M BWPs include a side link BWP and a cellular link BWP.
该M个BWP可以在同一个载波上,也可以在不同载波上,本申请实施例对此不作限定。The M BWPs may be on the same carrier or different carriers, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
在该M个BWP同时切换前,该第一终端设备向网络设备上报以下信息:是否支持同时切换该蜂窝链路BWP和该侧行链路BWP;或支持同时切换该蜂窝链路BWP和该侧行链路BWP的总数量;和/或在支持同时切换该换蜂窝链路BWP和该侧行链路BWP条件下,支持该蜂窝链路BWP同时切换数量和支持该侧行链路BWP中同时切换的BWP的数量;或在支持同时切换该换蜂窝链路BWP和该侧行链路BWP条件下,支持同时切换该蜂窝链路BWP的切换时延或切换时延类型和该侧行链路BWP的切换时延或切换时延类型。Before the M BWPs are switched simultaneously, the first terminal device reports the following information to the network device: whether to support switching between the cellular link BWP and the side link BWP simultaneously; or whether to support switching between the cellular link BWP and the side simultaneously The total number of downlink BWPs; and/or the number of simultaneous switching of the cellular link BWP and the simultaneous support of the lateral downlink BWP under the condition of supporting simultaneous switching of the switching cellular link BWP and the side link BWP The number of BWPs to be switched; or the switch delay or the type of switch delay and the side link to switch the BWP of the cellular link at the same time under the condition of supporting simultaneous switching of the BWP of the switching cellular link and the BWP of the side link BWP switching delay or switching delay type.
例如,在该M个BWP同时切换之前,第一终端设备需要先向网络设备上报是否允许同时切换该蜂窝链路BWP和该侧行链路BWP,若不允许,则不进行该M个BWP的同时切换;若允许,则上报支持同时切换该蜂窝链路BWP和该侧行链路BWP的总数量,例如N,N为小于或等于M正整数。同时上报该N个同时切换的BWP中蜂窝链路BWP数量及类型和该侧行链路BWP数量及类型,从而确定第一切换时长,实现N个包括蜂窝链路BWP和侧行链路BWP的同时切换。For example, before the M BWPs are switched simultaneously, the first terminal device needs to first report to the network device whether to allow simultaneous switching of the cellular link BWP and the side link BWP. If not, the M BWPs are not performed. Simultaneous switching; if allowed, report the total number of simultaneous switching of the cellular link BWP and the side link BWP, such as N, where N is a positive integer less than or equal to M. The number and type of cellular links BWP and the number and type of the side link BWP in the N simultaneous switched BWPs are reported at the same time, so as to determine the first switching duration and realize the N number including the cellular link BWP and the side link BWP Switch simultaneously.
S406,该第一终端设备根据该配置信息中第一BWP的配置信息、第二BWP的配置信息以及切换指示信息从第一BWP切换至第二BWP。S406. The first terminal device switches from the first BWP to the second BWP according to the configuration information of the first BWP, the configuration information of the second BWP, and the switching instruction information in the configuration information.
该第一终端设备在从第一BWP切换至第二BWP时,利用到的配置信息只是切换前的第一BWP的配置信息以及切换后的第二BWP的配置信息。根据该至少两种连接状态的不同,第一终端设备从第一BWP切换至第二BWP可以包括不同的场景。When the first terminal device switches from the first BWP to the second BWP, the configuration information used is only the configuration information of the first BWP before switching and the configuration information of the second BWP after switching. According to the difference in the at least two connection states, the first terminal device switching from the first BWP to the second BWP may include different scenarios.
可选的,本申请中第一BWP的配置信息和第二BWP的配置信息可以来自同一个消息,也可以同自于不同的消息,还可以来自同一个消息中的不同的部分。例如,可以是通过同一个SIB或RRC消息或预配置消息发送给终端设备的,可以是通过不同SIB消息或不同的RRC消息或不同的或预配置消息发送给终端设备的,还可以是通过一个SIB消息或一个RRC消息或一个预配置消息中的不同字段或消息体的不同部分发送给终端设备的,本申请实施例对此不作限定。Optionally, the configuration information of the first BWP and the configuration information of the second BWP in this application may come from the same message, or from different messages, or may come from different parts of the same message. For example, it can be sent to the terminal device through the same SIB or RRC message or pre-configured message, it can be sent to the terminal device through different SIB messages or different RRC messages or different or pre-configured messages, or it can be sent through a Different fields in the SIB message, an RRC message, or a pre-configured message or different parts of the message body are sent to the terminal device, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
例如,该第一BWP为连接态对应的BWP,该第二BWP为连接态对应的BWP;或该第一BWP为连接态对应的BWP,该第二BWP为空闲态对应的BWP;或该第一BWP为连接态对应的BWP,该第二BWP为网络外对应的BWP;或该第一BWP为空闲态对应的 BWP,该第二BWP为连接态对应的BWP;或该第一BWP为空闲态对应的BWP,该第二BWP为网络外对应的BWP;或该第一BWP为网络外对应的BWP,该第二BWP为连接态对应的BWP;或该第一BWP为网络外对应的BWP,该第二BWP为空闲态对应的BWP。For example, the first BWP is the BWP corresponding to the connected state, and the second BWP is the BWP corresponding to the connected state; or the first BWP is the BWP corresponding to the connected state, and the second BWP is the BWP corresponding to the idle state; or the first A BWP is a BWP corresponding to a connected state, the second BWP is a corresponding BWP outside the network; or the first BWP is a BWP corresponding to an idle state, and the second BWP is a BWP corresponding to a connected state; or the first BWP is idle The second BWP is the corresponding BWP outside the network; or the first BWP is the corresponding BWP outside the network; the second BWP is the BWP corresponding to the connected state; or the first BWP is the corresponding BWP outside the network. , The second BWP is the BWP corresponding to the idle state.
可选地,该步骤S405可以为该第一终端设备根据该配置信息中该第一BWP的配置信息与该第二BWP的配置信息,以及预配置切换条件从该第一BWP切换到该第二BWP。Optionally, this step S405 may be that the first terminal device switches from the first BWP to the second according to the configuration information of the first BWP and the configuration information of the second BWP in the configuration information and the pre-configured switching conditions BWP.
其中,该预配置切换条件为该第一终端设备的连接状态的切换与BWP切换的对应关系。Wherein, the pre-configured switching condition is a correspondence between switching of the connection state of the first terminal device and BWP switching.
可选地,该预配置切换条件可以为系统预先配置的,或者是协议中预定义的,还可以是第一终端设备的连接状态的切换时,向网络设备上报信息,网络设备接收到该第一终端设备上报的信息后配置的,本申请实施例对此不作限定。Optionally, the pre-configured switching conditions may be pre-configured by the system, or pre-defined in the protocol, or may be reported to the network device when the connection state of the first terminal device is switched, and the network device receives the first It is configured after the information reported by a terminal device is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
系统预先配置的,是指将通信相关的参数或配置信息提前预配置到通信的终端设备当中。这种方法通常可以用于网络覆盖外的场景下,因为此时终端设备连接不到网络设备,只能通过这种方式来获取配置信息。The system is pre-configured, which means that the communication-related parameters or configuration information are pre-configured into the communication terminal device in advance. This method can usually be used in scenarios beyond network coverage, because the terminal device cannot connect to the network device at this time, and the configuration information can only be obtained in this way.
可选地,这些信息可以通过提前写到终端设备的缓存的方式来实现预配置。Optionally, the information can be pre-configured by writing to the cache of the terminal device in advance.
可选地,该预配置切换条件包括:在该第一终端设备从连接态切换到空闲态的情况下,该第一终端设备从该连接态对应的至少一个BWP中的一个BWP切换到该空闲态对应的一个BWP;或在该第一终端设备从空闲态切换到连接态的情况下,该第一终端设备从该空闲态对应的一个BWP切换到该连接态对应的至少一个BWP中的一个BWP;或在该第一终端设备从连接态切换到网络外的情况下,该第一终端设备从该连接态对应的一个BWP切换到该网络外对应的至少一个BWP中的一个BWP;或在该第一终端设备从网络外切换到连接态的情况下,该第一终端设备从该网络外对应的一个BWP切换到该连接态对应的至少一个BWP中的一个BWP;或在该第一终端设备从网络外切换到空闲态的情况下,该第一终端设备从该网络外对应的一个BWP切换到该空闲态对应的一个BWP;或在该第一终端设备从空闲态切换到网络外的情况下,该第一终端设备从该空闲态对应的一个BWP切换到该网络外对应的至少一个BWP中的一个BWP。Optionally, the pre-configured switching condition includes: in a case where the first terminal device switches from a connected state to an idle state, the first terminal device switches from one BWP of at least one BWP corresponding to the connected state to the idle state A BWP corresponding to the state; or when the first terminal device switches from the idle state to the connected state, the first terminal device switches from a BWP corresponding to the idle state to one of at least one BWP corresponding to the connected state BWP; or in the case where the first terminal device is switched from the connected state to outside the network, the first terminal device is switched from a BWP corresponding to the connected state to one BWP of at least one BWP corresponding to the outside of the network; or When the first terminal device switches from the outside of the network to the connected state, the first terminal device switches from a BWP corresponding to the outside of the network to one BWP of at least one BWP corresponding to the connected state; or at the first terminal When the device switches from outside the network to the idle state, the first terminal device switches from a BWP corresponding to the outside of the network to a BWP corresponding to the idle state; or when the first terminal device switches from the idle state to outside the network In this case, the first terminal device switches from a BWP corresponding to the idle state to one BWP of at least one BWP corresponding to the outside of the network.
可选地,针对现有的终端设备状态切换对应的BWP切换的所有场景,通信系统可以根据终端设备不同的状态切换,预先配置相应的BWP切换条件。例如,预定义如表2所示的预配置切换条件与第一终端设备状态切换的对应关系。Optionally, for all scenes of BWP switching corresponding to existing terminal device state switching, the communication system may pre-configure corresponding BWP switching conditions according to different state switching of the terminal device. For example, the correspondence between the pre-configured switching conditions shown in Table 2 and the state switching of the first terminal device is predefined.
表2 预配置切换条件与第一终端设备状态切换的对应关系Table 2 Correspondence between pre-configured switching conditions and state switching of the first terminal device
第一终端设备连接状态切换Switching the connection state of the first terminal device 标识Logo 预配置切换条件Pre-configured switching conditions
连接态切换到空闲态Connect to idle state 11 条件1 Condition 1
空闲态切换到连接态Switch from idle state to connected state 22 条件2 Condition 2
连接态切换到网络外Switching the connection state out of the network 33 条件3 Condition 3
网络外切换到连接态Switch to connected state outside the network 44 条件4 Condition 4
网络外切换到空闲态Switch to idle state outside the network 55 条件5Condition 5
空闲态切换到网络外Switching out of the network in idle state 66 条件6Condition 6
如表2所示,第一终端设备连接状态切换、标识以及预配置切换条件之间一一对应。预配置切换条件1至预配置切换条件6依次与上述列出的预配置条件依次对应。例如,预 配置切换条件1为第一终端设备从该连接态对应的至少一个BWP中的一个BWP切换到该空闲态对应的一个BWP,预配置条件2为该第一终端设备从该空闲态对应的一个BWP切换到该连接态对应的至少一个BWP中的一个BWP,依次类推,预配置切换条件6为该第一终端设备从该空闲态对应的一个BWP切换到该网络外对应的至少一个BWP中的一个BWP。当第一终端设备与网络设备的连接状态发生变化时,根据不同的状态变化向系统反馈该状态切换对应的标识信息,根据该标识信息,通过查寻表2,确定预配置切换条件。例如,当第一终端设备从连接态切换到空闲态时,向系统反馈标识信息1。根据预定义的预配置切换条件与第一终端设备状态切换的对应关系,系统根据该标识信息,确定相应的预配置切换条件为条件1,则第一终端设备根据相应的预配置切换条件,从该连接态对应的至少一个BWP中的一个BWP切换到该空闲态对应的一个BWP。As shown in Table 2, there is a one-to-one correspondence between connection state switching, identification and pre-configured switching conditions of the first terminal device. The pre-configuration switching condition 1 to the pre-configuration switching condition 6 sequentially correspond to the pre-configuration conditions listed above. For example, the pre-configured switching condition 1 is that the first terminal device switches from one of the at least one BWP corresponding to the connected state to a BWP corresponding to the idle state, and the pre-configured condition 2 is that the first terminal device corresponds to the idle state from the idle state Switch a BWP to a BWP of at least one BWP corresponding to the connected state, and so on, and pre-configured switching condition 6 is that the first terminal device switches from a BWP corresponding to the idle state to at least one BWP corresponding to the outside of the network One of the BWP. When the connection state of the first terminal device and the network device changes, the identification information corresponding to the state switch is fed back to the system according to the different state changes, and according to the identification information, the pre-configured switching conditions are determined by looking up Table 2. For example, when the first terminal device switches from the connected state to the idle state, the identification information 1 is fed back to the system. According to the correspondence between the pre-defined pre-configured switching conditions and the state switching of the first terminal device, the system determines the corresponding pre-configured switching conditions as condition 1 according to the identification information, then the first terminal device according to the corresponding pre-configured switching conditions, from One BWP of the at least one BWP corresponding to the connected state is switched to a BWP corresponding to the idle state.
例如,该第一终端设备在服务小区内从空闲态开始随机接入,如果随机接入过程成功,则该第一终端设备与网络设备的连接状态从空闲态变为连接态,则该第一终端设备从空闲态对应的第一BWP切换到连接态对应的第二BWP。如果随机接入过程失败,则该第一终端设备与网络设备的连接状态仍然为空闲态,该第一终端设备仍在空闲态对应的第一BWP上工作,不进行BWP切换。For example, the first terminal device starts random access from the idle state in the serving cell. If the random access process is successful, the connection state between the first terminal device and the network device changes from the idle state to the connected state. The terminal device switches from the first BWP corresponding to the idle state to the second BWP corresponding to the connected state. If the random access process fails, the connection state between the first terminal device and the network device is still in the idle state, and the first terminal device still works on the first BWP corresponding to the idle state, and BWP switching is not performed.
上述内容主要描述了第一终端设备进行BWP切换的几种场景,在实际工作中,该第一终端设备进行BWP切换的场景可以包括以上至少一种。The above content mainly describes several scenarios where the first terminal device performs BWP switching. In actual work, the scenario where the first terminal device performs BWP switching may include at least one of the above.
另外,处于同一连接状态的终端设备之间可以正常进行通信,比如,10个处于连接态的终端设备之间的通信或10个处于空闲态的终端设备之间的通信。但处于不同连接状态的终端设备之间的通信会受到影响,比如处于连接态的终端设备发送的信息,处于空闲态的终端设备无法接收到。In addition, the terminal devices in the same connection state can communicate normally, for example, communication between 10 terminal devices in a connected state or communication between 10 terminal devices in an idle state. However, the communication between the terminal devices in different connection states will be affected, for example, the information sent by the terminal device in the connected state cannot be received by the terminal device in the idle state.
为了提高不同连接状态的终端设备之间的通信可靠性,不同连接状态的终端设备设备之间互相进行通信时,该配置信息还可以包括该配置信息还可以包括不同连接状态下的终端设备的侧行链路BWP的时频资源。In order to improve the communication reliability between terminal devices in different connection states, when terminal device devices in different connection states communicate with each other, the configuration information may also include the configuration information and may also include the side of the terminal device in different connection states Time-frequency resources of the BWP of the link.
可选地,该配置信息还可以包括不同连接状态下的终端设备的侧行链路BWP的时频资源。其中,该终端设备的发送时频资源和接收时频资源都位于侧行链路BWP中,为了保证通信可靠性,用于连接态下的终端设备的侧行链路BWP的接收时频资源为用于空闲态下的终端设备的侧行链路BWP的接收时频资源的子集;和/或,用于网络外的终端设备的侧行链路BWP的接收时频资源为用于空闲态下的终端设备的侧行链路BWP的接收时频资源的子集;和/或,该用于连接态下的终端设备的侧行链路BWP的接收时频资源为该用于网络外的终端设备的侧行链路BWP的接收时频资源的子集;和/或,该用于空闲态下的终端设备的侧行链路BWP的接收时频资源为该用于网络外的终端设备的侧行链路BWP的接收时频资源的子集。Optionally, the configuration information may also include time-frequency resources of the side link BWP of the terminal device in different connection states. Among them, the transmission time-frequency resource and the reception time-frequency resource of the terminal device are located in the side link BWP. In order to ensure communication reliability, the reception time-frequency resource of the side link BWP for the terminal device in the connected state is A subset of the reception time-frequency resources of the side link BWP of the terminal device in the idle state; and/or the reception time-frequency resources of the side link BWP of the terminal device outside the network are used in the idle state A subset of the received time-frequency resources of the side link BWP of the terminal device; and/or the received time-frequency resources of the side link BWP of the terminal device in the connected state are the A subset of the side-link BWP reception time-frequency resources of the terminal device; and/or the side-link BWP reception time-frequency resource of the terminal device in the idle state is the terminal device used outside the network The subset of BWP received time-frequency resources.
可选地,用于空闲态下的终端设备的侧行链路BWP的发送时频资源与用于连接态下的发送时频资源相同;和/或,用于空闲态下的终端设备的侧行链路BWP的发送时频资源与用于网络外的发送时频资源相同;和/或,用于网络外的终端设备的侧行链路BWP的发送时频资源与用于连接态下的发送时频资源相同;和/或,用于网络外的终端设备的侧行链路BWP的发送时频资源与用于空闲态下的发送时频资源相同。Optionally, the transmission time-frequency resource for the side link BWP of the terminal device in the idle state is the same as the transmission time-frequency resource for the connected state; and/or, the side of the terminal device in the idle state The transmission time-frequency resource of the downlink BWP is the same as the transmission time-frequency resource used outside the network; and/or the transmission time-frequency resource of the side link BWP used for the terminal device outside the network is the same as that used in the connected state. The transmission time-frequency resource is the same; and/or, the transmission time-frequency resource used for the side link BWP of the terminal device outside the network is the same as the transmission time-frequency resource used in the idle state.
比如,当前通信系统中存在10个处于连接态下的终端设备,10个处于空闲态的终端 设备,当这10个处于连接态下的终端设备与10个处于空闲态下的终端设备之间进行通信时,其中处于连接态之间的侧行链路BWP在其对应的发送时频资源上发送信息,为了保证通信的正常,该配置信息配置这10个用于连接态下的终端设备的侧行链路BWP的接收时频资源为1MHz,10个用于空闲态下的终端设备的侧行链路BWP的接收时频资源为2MHz,即用于空闲态下的终端设备的侧行链路BWP的接收时频资源可以包括用于连接态下的终端设备的侧行链路BWP的接收时频资源,从而使得该连接态下的终端设备发送的信息,处于空闲态下的终端设备也能接收到,实现处于不同连接状态的终端设备之间可以正常通信。For example, there are 10 terminal devices in the connected state and 10 terminal devices in the idle state in the current communication system. When these 10 terminal devices in the connected state and 10 terminal devices in the idle state When communicating, the side link BWP in the connected state sends information on its corresponding transmission time-frequency resource. In order to ensure the normal communication, the configuration information configures the 10 sides used for the connected terminal device The reception time-frequency resource of the downlink BWP is 1MHz, and the 10 side-link BWP reception time-frequency resources of the terminal device in the idle state are 2MHz, that is, the side-link of the terminal device in the idle state The BWP reception time-frequency resource may include a side link BWP reception time-frequency resource for the terminal device in the connected state, so that the information sent by the terminal device in the connected state can also be used by the terminal device in the idle state Received, it can realize normal communication between terminal devices in different connection states.
步骤S401至S406详细描述了第一终端设备从第一BWP切换至第二BWP的过程。在BWP切换完成后,为了进一步确保所有的BWP同时切换完成,则可以在BWP切换完成后,检验是否所有的BWP完成切换。Steps S401 to S406 describe in detail the process of the first terminal device switching from the first BWP to the second BWP. After the BWP switching is completed, in order to further ensure that all BWP switching is completed at the same time, you can check whether all BWPs have completed the switching after the BWP switching is completed.
S407,第一终端设备接收网络设备发送的第一指示信息。S407: The first terminal device receives the first indication information sent by the network device.
在第一终端设备从第一BWP切换至第二BWP后,网络设备向该第一终端设备发送第一指示信息,该第一指示信息用于该第一终端设备确定该侧行链路第一BWP切换成功。After the first terminal device switches from the first BWP to the second BWP, the network device sends first indication information to the first terminal device, where the first indication information is used by the first terminal device to determine the side link first BWP switching was successful.
可选地,该第一指示信息可以包括以下中的至少一种:第一BWP的指示信息;第二BWP的指示信息;时间间隔信息,其中,该时间间隔信息指示从该侧行链路第一BWP切换至侧行链路第二BWP的切换的开始时刻或完成时刻与该第一指示信息的传输时刻的间隔。Optionally, the first indication information may include at least one of the following: indication information of the first BWP; indication information of the second BWP; and time interval information, wherein the time interval information indicates that the The interval between the start time or completion time of the handover of a BWP to the second BWP of the side link and the transmission time of the first indication information
可选地,该第一指示信息可以在切换前的BWP上发送,也可以在切换后的BWP上发送。当第一指示信息在切换前的BWP上发送时,若终端设备接收到该第一指示信息,则表明该终端设备未切换成功。同理,当该第一指示信息在切换后的BWP上发送,若终端设备未接收到该第一指示信息,则表明该终端设备未切换成功。通过这种方式,可以确定该终端设备是否切换成功。Optionally, the first indication information may be sent on the BWP before switching, or may be sent on the BWP after switching. When the first indication information is sent on the BWP before switching, if the terminal device receives the first indication information, it indicates that the terminal device has not successfully switched. Similarly, when the first indication information is sent on the switched BWP, if the terminal device does not receive the first indication information, it indicates that the terminal device has not successfully switched. In this way, it can be determined whether the terminal device is successfully switched.
可选地,还包括步骤S408,该第一终端设备向网络设备发送第二指示信息。Optionally, step S408 is also included, and the first terminal device sends second indication information to the network device.
该第二指示信息用于确定该第一BWP切换成功。The second indication information is used to determine that the first BWP handover is successful.
可选地,该第二指示信息包括以下中的任意一种:该第一BWP的指示信息;该第二BWP的指示信息;该BWP切换成功的指示。Optionally, the second indication information includes any one of the following: indication information of the first BWP; indication information of the second BWP; indication of successful BWP handover.
例如,当该第二指示信息中该BWP切换成功的指示为1时,表示该第一BWP切换成功;或者该BWP切换成功的指示为T时,表示该第一BWP切换成功,本申请实施例对比并不作限定。For example, when the indication of the successful BWP switching in the second indication information is 1, it indicates that the first BWP switching is successful; or when the indication of the successful BWP switching is T, it indicates that the first BWP switching is successful. This embodiment of the present application The comparison is not limited.
可选地,当多个BWP同时被激活时,如果其中任意一个激活的BWP在进行切换时,可能会对同时工作的其它激活态的BWP造成业务上的中断。为了减小多个同时激活的BWP在切换过程中的互相影响,本申请一个实施例提出了一种多个BWP同时切换的方法,图7是本申请实施例提供的通信方法700的示意性流程图。Optionally, when multiple BWPs are activated at the same time, if any one of the activated BWPs is switching, it may cause service interruption to other activated BWPs that are working simultaneously. In order to reduce the mutual influence of multiple simultaneously activated BWPs during the switching process, an embodiment of the present application proposes a method for simultaneous switching of multiple BWPs. FIG. 7 is a schematic flowchart of a communication method 700 provided by an embodiment of the present application Figure.
S710,第一终端设备获取网络设备发送的第一切换指示信息,该第一切换指示信息用于指示当前激活的M个BWP的切换,M为大于1的正整数。S710. The first terminal device obtains first switching instruction information sent by the network device, where the first switching instruction information is used to indicate the currently activated switching of M BWPs, where M is a positive integer greater than 1.
应理解,该当前激活的M个BWP链路类型可以相同也可以不同,比如,可以为M个侧行链路,也可以为M个蜂窝链路,或者为M个侧行链路和蜂窝链路,本申请实施例对此并不作限定。It should be understood that the currently activated M BWP link types may be the same or different, for example, may be M side links, M cellular links, or M side links and cellular links This is not limited in the embodiments of the present application.
可选地,当前激活的M个BWP可以在同一个载波上,也可以在不同载波上,本申请实施例对此不作限定。Optionally, the currently activated M BWPs may be on the same carrier or different carriers, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
S720,第一终端设备根据该第一切换指示信息进行BWP切换。S720. The first terminal device performs BWP switching according to the first switching instruction information.
在当前激活的M个BWP同时切换前,该第一终端设备向网络设备上报以下信息:是否支持同时切换该蜂窝链路BWP和该侧行链路BWP;或支持同时切换该蜂窝链路BWP和该侧行链路BWP的总数量;和/或在支持同时切换该换蜂窝链路BWP和该侧行链路BWP条件下,支持该蜂窝链路BWP同时切换数量和支持该侧行链路BWP中同时切换的BWP的数量;或在支持同时切换该换蜂窝链路BWP和该侧行链路BWP条件下,支持同时切换该蜂窝链路BWP的切换时延或切换时延类型和该侧行链路BWP的切换时延或切换时延类型。Before the currently activated M BWPs are switched simultaneously, the first terminal device reports the following information to the network device: whether to support simultaneous switching of the cellular link BWP and the side link BWP; or to support simultaneous switching of the cellular link BWP and The total number of side link BWPs; and/or the number of simultaneous switching of the cellular link BWP and the side link BWP under the condition of supporting simultaneous switching of the switching cellular link BWP and the side link BWP The number of BWPs that are switched simultaneously in the medium; or the switch delay or the type of switch delay and the side row that support the switch of the cellular link BWP at the same time under the condition of supporting the simultaneous switching of the switching cellular link BWP and the side link BWP Switching delay or type of switching delay for link BWP.
例如,在当前激活的M个BWP同时切换之前,第一终端设备需要先向网络设备上报是否允许同时切换该蜂窝链路BWP和该侧行链路BWP,若不允许,则不进行该M个BWP的同时切换;若允许,则上报支持同时切换该蜂窝链路BWP和该侧行链路BWP的总数量,例如N,N为小于或等于M正整数。同时上报该N个同时切换的BWP中蜂窝链路BWP数量及类型和该侧行链路BWP数量及类型,从而确定第一切换时长,实现N个包括蜂窝链路BWP和侧行链路BWP的同时切换。For example, before the currently activated M BWPs are switched simultaneously, the first terminal device needs to first report to the network device whether to allow simultaneous switching of the cellular link BWP and the side link BWP. If not, the M MWPs are not performed. Simultaneous BWP handover; if allowed, report the total number of BWP and sidelink BWP that support simultaneous handover of the cellular link, for example, N, where N is a positive integer less than or equal to M. The number and type of cellular links BWP and the number and type of the side link BWP in the N simultaneous switched BWPs are reported at the same time, so as to determine the first switching duration and realize the N number including the cellular link BWP and the side link BWP Switch simultaneously.
另外,该M个BWP可以在一个载波上,也可以在多个载波上,本申请实施例对此并不作限定。In addition, the M BWPs may be on one carrier or on multiple carriers, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
进一步,在根据该第一切换指示信息进行侧行链路的BWP的切换之前,终端设备向网络设备上报以下信息:是否支持同时切换该蜂窝链路的BWP和该侧行链路的BWP;或支持同时切换该蜂窝链路的BWP和该侧行链路的BWP的总数量;和/或在支持同时切换该换蜂窝链路的BWP和该侧行链路的BWP条件下,支持该蜂窝链路BWP同时切换数量和支持该侧行链路的BWP中同时切换的BWP的数量;或支持同时切换该蜂窝链路的BWP和该侧行链路的BWP的切换时延或切换时延类型;或支持多个相同链路的BWP的切换时延或切换时延类型。是否支持同时激活超过一个BWP。其中,该超过一个BWP可以为一种类型的多个BWP,也可以为多种类型的BWP。是否支持同时切换超过一个BWP;或支持同时切换该蜂窝链路的BWP和该侧行链路的BWP的切换时延或切换时延类型;或支持多个相同链路的BWP的切换时延或切换时延类型。Further, before switching the BWP of the side link according to the first switching instruction information, the terminal device reports the following information to the network device: whether it is supported to switch the BWP of the cellular link and the BWP of the side link at the same time; or The total number of BWPs supporting the simultaneous switching of the cellular link and the BWP of the side link; and/or under the conditions of supporting the simultaneous switching of the BWP of the changing cellular link and the BWP of the side link, supporting the cellular link The number of simultaneous BWP handovers and the number of BWPs simultaneously supported in the BWP supporting the side link; or the handover delay or handover delay type supporting the simultaneous handover of the BWP of the cellular link and the BWP of the side link; Or support multiple BWP switch delays or switch delay types for the same link. Whether it supports simultaneous activation of more than one BWP. Wherein, the more than one BWP may be multiple BWPs of one type or multiple types of BWP. Whether it supports simultaneous switching of more than one BWP; or supports the switching delay or type of switching delay between the BWP of the cellular link and the BWP of the side link; or supports the switching delay of multiple BWPs of the same link or Switch the delay type.
比如,当该上报的信息为1时,指示进行切换的多个BWP为同种类型,当该上报的信息为0时,指示进行切换的多个BWP为多种类型;或者,该上报的信息为0时,指示进行切换的多个BWP为同种类型,当该上报的信息为1时,指示进行切换的多个BWP为多种类型,本申请实施例并不对此作限定。For example, when the reported information is 1, the multiple BWPs indicating switching are of the same type, and when the reported information is 0, the multiple BWPs indicating switching are of multiple types; or, the reported information When it is 0, the multiple BWPs indicating the handover are of the same type, and when the reported information is 1, the multiple BWPs indicating the handover are of multiple types, which is not limited in the embodiments of the present application.
该上报的信息可以包括支持同时激活的BWP的数量。例如,当该上报的信息指示支持同时激活一种类型的多个BWP时,该上报的信息还可以包括同时激活该同种类型的BWP的数量;当该上报的信息指示支持同时激活多种类型的多个BWP时,该上报的信息还可以包括同时激活该同种类型的BWP的数量,其中,当多种类型包括蜂窝链路的BWP和侧行链路的BWP时,该数量具体为该蜂窝链路的BWP的数量和侧行链路的BWP的数量。The reported information may include the number of BWPs that support simultaneous activation. For example, when the reported information indicates that multiple BWPs of the same type are activated at the same time, the reported information may also include the number of simultaneous activations of the same type of BWP; when the reported information indicates that multiple types of BWP are activated simultaneously In the case of multiple BWPs, the reported information may also include the number of simultaneous activations of the same type of BWP, where, when multiple types include cellular link BWP and side link BWP, the number is specifically The number of BWP of the cellular link and the number of BWP of the side link.
该第一切换指示信息还包括进行多个激活的BWP的切换时长信息。由于BWP的切 换时长与该多个BWP的类型有关,因此,在进行BWP切换之前,终端设备向服务基站还需要上报支持同时激活的BWP的类型,根据该BWP类型确定该BWP的切换时长。The first switching instruction information further includes switching duration information of multiple activated BWPs. Since the switching duration of the BWP is related to the types of the multiple BWPs, before the BWP switching is performed, the terminal device also needs to report the type of the BWP that supports simultaneous activation to the serving base station, and determine the switching duration of the BWP according to the BWP type.
例如,当该多个BWP为3个BWP,分别为BWP1、BWP2、BWP3,其中,BWP1和BWP2为type1,BWP3为type2。当这3个BWP同时切换时,根据表1可得,BWP1和BWP2的切换时延为600us,BWP3的切换时延为2000us。假设选择BWP1、BWP2的切换时延600us为BWP1、BWP2、BWP3同时切换的切换时长,则在切换过程中,当BWP1和BWP2切换完成后,由于BWP3的切换时延为2000us大于600us,所以BWP3还未完成切换,会对已经切换完成的BWP1和BWP2产生业务上的中断。因此,在指示切换时长时,应该选择这3个BWP中切换时延的最大值为同时切换的切换时长,即选择BWP3的切换时延2000us为BWP1、BWP2、BWP3同时切换的切换时长。For example, when the multiple BWPs are three BWPs, namely BWP1, BWP2, and BWP3, BWP1 and BWP2 are type1, and BWP3 is type2. When these 3 BWPs are switched simultaneously, according to Table 1, the switching delay of BWP1 and BWP2 is 600us, and the switching delay of BWP3 is 2000us. Assuming that the switching delay of 600 W for BWP1 and BWP2 is the switching time for switching BWP1, BWP2, and BWP3 at the same time, during the switching process, when the switching of BWP1 and BWP2 is completed, because the switching delay of BWP3 is 2000us greater than 600us, BWP3 also If the switch is not completed, service interruption will be generated for BWP1 and BWP2 that have been switched over. Therefore, when instructing the switching duration, the maximum switching delay among the three BWPs should be selected as the switching duration of simultaneous switching, that is, the switching delay of 2000us for BWP3 is selected as the switching duration of BWP1, BWP2, and BWP3 simultaneous switching.
进一步,当通信业务为单播业务时,切换时长为这一对做单播的终端设备分别上报的切换时延的最大值;当通信业务为组播业务时,切换时长为这一组做组播的终端设备分别上报的切换时延的最大值;当通信业务为广播业务时,切换时延为所有做广播的终端设备上报的切换时延的最大值。Further, when the communication service is a unicast service, the switching duration is the maximum value of the switching delay reported by the pair of unicast terminals respectively; when the communication service is a multicast service, the switching duration is grouped for this group The maximum switching delay reported by the broadcast terminal devices respectively; when the communication service is a broadcast service, the switching delay is the maximum switching delay reported by all broadcast terminal devices.
根据不同通信业务类型确定终端设备对应的BWP切换时延的最大值,确定该最大值为进行侧行链路的切换时长,保证同时激活的多个BWP能够同时进行切换,减小同时激活的多个BWP在切换过程中互相造成的中断干扰,提升了通信质量与可靠性。Determine the maximum value of the BWP switching delay corresponding to the terminal device according to different communication service types, and determine the maximum value as the switching duration of the side link, to ensure that multiple BWPs activated simultaneously can be switched simultaneously, reducing the number of simultaneous activations. The interruption caused by each BWP during the handover process improves the communication quality and reliability.
可选地,该第一切换指示信息包括SIB、RRC、MAC CE或DCI中的任意一种或多种组合来承载,本申请实施例对此并不做限定。Optionally, the first handover indication information includes any one or more combinations of SIB, RRC, MAC CE or DCI to carry, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
由于在本申请实施例中,接收到第一切换指示信息后,多个BWP需要同时进行切换,为了准确的实现多个BWP切换,第一切换指示信息需要包括该多个BWP中各个BWP的切换前的指示信息以及切换后的BWP指示信息,使得该多个BWP能够同时准确完成切换。In this embodiment of the present application, after receiving the first switching instruction information, multiple BWPs need to be switched at the same time. In order to accurately achieve multiple BWP switching, the first switching instruction information needs to include the switching of each BWP in the multiple BWPs The indication information before and the BWP indication information after switching enable the multiple BWPs to complete the switching accurately at the same time.
以2个BWP(BWP1和BWP2)同时切换为例,该第一切换指示信息中包括BWP1切换前的指示信息,该指示信息可以为BWP1,对应的切换后的指示信息为BWP3,相应地,BWP2对应的切换前的指示信息为BWP2,切换后的指示信息为BWP4。则当接收到第一指示信息后,BWP1切换到BWP3的同时BWP2切换到BWP4。Taking the simultaneous switching of two BWPs (BWP1 and BWP2) as an example, the first switching indication information includes indication information before BWP1 switching. The indication information may be BWP1, and the corresponding indication information after switching is BWP3. Accordingly, BWP2 The corresponding instruction information before switching is BWP2, and the instruction information after switching is BWP4. After receiving the first instruction information, BWP1 switches to BWP3 and BWP2 switches to BWP4.
如果该多个BWP频分或时分地工作在一个共享载波上,则该第一切换指示信息中包含的切换前BWP的指示信息可以分别为该多个BWP分别工作的频率或时刻,相应的切换后的BWP的指示信息为切换到的目标BWP的工作频率或时刻。If the multiple BWPs work on a shared carrier in frequency or time division, the indication information of the pre-handover BWP included in the first handover indication information may be the frequency or time at which the multiple BWPs respectively work, and the corresponding handover The indication information of the following BWP is the working frequency or time of the target BWP switched to.
应理解,该第一切换指示信息中包括的切换前的BWP的指示信息和切换后的BWP的指示信息还可以为其它具有标识的信息,本申请实施例对此并不作限定。It should be understood that the indication information of the BWP before handover and the indication information of the BWP after handover included in the first handover instruction information may also be other information with identification, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
在本申请实施例中,第一终端设备根据获取的第一切换指示信息,同时进行当前激活的M个BWP进行切换,减小了同时工作的多个BWP中一部分BWP切换时对其它激活态的BWP造成的中断干扰,提高通信可靠性。In the embodiment of the present application, the first terminal device simultaneously performs switching of the currently activated M BWPs according to the acquired first switching instruction information, which reduces the number of other activated states during switching of a part of BWPs among multiple BWPs working simultaneously. Interruption caused by BWP improves communication reliability.
图8示出了本申请实施例提供的通信方法800的示意性流程图。FIG. 8 shows a schematic flowchart of a communication method 800 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
S810,第一终端设备获取用于侧行链路第一带宽部分BWP对应的定时器的配置信息。S810. The first terminal device acquires configuration information of a timer corresponding to the first bandwidth part BWP of the side link.
网络设备向该第一终端设备发送该侧行链路第一BWP对应的定时器的配置信息。The network device sends the configuration information of the timer corresponding to the first BWP of the side link to the first terminal device.
S820,第一终端设备根据该定时器的配置信息,管理定时器。S820. The first terminal device manages the timer according to the configuration information of the timer.
当该定时器过期,从该侧行链路第一BWP切换到侧行链路第二BWP,该侧行链路第一BWP为当前激活的侧行链路的BWP,该侧行链路第二BWP为空闲态的终端设备的侧行链路的BWP或用于网络外的侧行链路的BWP。When the timer expires, the first BWP of the side link is switched to the second BWP of the side link. The first BWP of the side link is the BWP of the currently activated side link. The second BWP is the BWP of the side link of the terminal device in the idle state or the BWP used for the side link outside the network.
应说明,该定时器过期是指该定时器的值超出了定义的定时器的持续时间,其中,该定时器的持续时间可以为预定义的、信令配置或预配置的,本申请实施例对此不作限定。It should be noted that the expiration of the timer means that the value of the timer exceeds the defined duration of the timer, where the duration of the timer may be pre-defined, signaling configured or pre-configured, embodiments of the present application There is no restriction on this.
可选地,在定时器过期时,若终端设备处于连接态,则该终端设备向网络设备发送该定时器过期的指示信息或该终端设备侧行链路BWP切换的指示信息。当网络设备接收到该指示信息时,该侧行链路第一BWP切换到该侧行链路第二BWP。Optionally, when the timer expires, if the terminal device is in the connected state, the terminal device sends to the network device indication information of the timer expiration or indication information of the terminal device side link BWP switching. When the network device receives the indication information, the side link first BWP is switched to the side link second BWP.
上述技术方案中,接收端终端设备通过获取该定时器的配置信息,根据该定时器的配置信息管理该定时器。具体地,根据该定时器配置信息管理该定时器包括定时器启动/重启、定时器步长加一或定时器过期。当定时器过期时,进行侧行链路的BWP的切换。减小了接收端终端设备在通信过程中掉线对通信质量的影响,提高了通信可靠性。In the above technical solution, the terminal device at the receiving end manages the timer according to the configuration information of the timer by acquiring the configuration information of the timer. Specifically, managing the timer according to the timer configuration information includes timer start/restart, timer step increment by one, or timer expiration. When the timer expires, the BWP of the side link is switched. The influence of the disconnection of the terminal device of the receiving end on the communication quality during the communication is reduced, and the communication reliability is improved.
可选地,该定时器的配置信息可以包括定时器的步长和/或定时器的持续时间。具体地,定时器的步长和/或定时器的持续时间与以下至少一种参数相关联:侧行链路的业务类型;侧行链路的服务质量(quality of service,QoS)参数;侧向链路的子载波间隔(subcarrier spacing,SCS)值;侧行链路所使用的资源池;侧行链路的波形类型。当上述参数中任意一个不同时,相应的定时器的步长和/或定时器的持续时间不同。Optionally, the configuration information of the timer may include the step size of the timer and/or the duration of the timer. Specifically, the step size of the timer and/or the duration of the timer are associated with at least one of the following parameters: the service type of the side link; the quality of service (QoS) parameter of the side link; the side Subcarrier spacing (SCS) value of the link; the resource pool used by the side link; the waveform type of the side link. When any of the above parameters are different, the corresponding timer step size and/or timer duration are different.
例如,当QoS要求较高时(例如低时延要求的)或SCS大一些(例如60kHz),定时器的步长和/或周期设置的小一些,当QoS要求较低时或SCS小一些,定时器的步长和/或周期设置的大一些。For example, when the QoS requirements are high (for example, low latency requirements) or the SCS is larger (for example, 60 kHz), the timer step size and/or period setting are smaller, when the QoS requirements are low or the SCS is smaller, The timer step and/or period are set larger.
可选地,该定时器的步长的时间可以包含在侧行链路的传输资源上。Optionally, the time of the timer step may be included in the transmission resources of the side link.
应说明,该定时器的状态还包括定时器运行、定时器开始/重启。It should be noted that the state of the timer also includes timer running, timer start/restart.
在通信过程中,当终端设备满足第一条件时,该侧行链路第一BWP对应的定时器开始或重启。其中,该第一条件为以下条件中任意一种:当终端设备处于连接态,成功检测到该服务基站发送的调度蜂窝链路的DCI时;当终端设备成功检测到第一终端设备发送的调度侧行链路的下行控制信息DCI时;当终端设备向服务基站或第一终端设备发一次侧行链路的缓存状态、侧行链路的调度请求、侧行链路的混合自动重传(hybrid automatic repeat request,HARQ)应答消息或侧行链路的信道状态信息CSI反馈信息;当该终端设备成功检测侧行链路的SCI时。In the communication process, when the terminal device meets the first condition, the timer corresponding to the first BWP of the side link starts or restarts. The first condition is any one of the following conditions: when the terminal device is in a connected state and successfully detects the DCI of the scheduling cellular link sent by the serving base station; when the terminal device successfully detects the scheduling sent by the first terminal device When the downlink control information of the side link is DCI; when the terminal device sends the buffer status of the side link, the scheduling request of the side link, and the hybrid automatic retransmission of the side link to the serving base station or the first terminal device once ( hybrid (automatic repeat request, HARQ) response message or channel state information CSI feedback information of the side link; when the terminal device successfully detects the SCI of the side link.
可选地,当终端设备成功接收到上述控制信息,则可以向网络设备发送确认(acknowledgement,ACK)信息应答信息,定时器启动或重启。Optionally, when the terminal device successfully receives the above control information, it may send an acknowledgement (ACK) information response message to the network device, and the timer is started or restarted.
在一些可替代的实施方式中可选地,该ACK信息可以是1个或多个。例如,在单播场下,网络设备收到终端设备的一个ACK信息;可以是在组播或广播场景下网络设备接收到其他终端设备的多个ACK信息。In some alternative embodiments, optionally, the ACK information may be one or more. For example, in a unicast field, the network device receives one ACK message from the terminal device; it may be that the network device receives multiple ACK messages from other terminal devices in a multicast or broadcast scenario.
应理解,在终端设备满足上述第一条件中任意一种时,若定时器未开启,则定时器开启;若定时器已开启且未过期时,该定时器重启。It should be understood that when the terminal device satisfies any one of the first conditions above, if the timer is not started, the timer is started; if the timer is started and has not expired, the timer restarts.
在本申请实施例中,当终端设备成功接收到上述控制信息时,表明该终端设备和该网络设备当前的通信正常,关于该网络设备和终端设备之间有关调度信息的理解一致。In the embodiment of the present application, when the terminal device successfully receives the above control information, it indicates that the current communication between the terminal device and the network device is normal, and the understanding about the scheduling information between the network device and the terminal device is consistent.
相应地,当该定时器正在运行且该定时器在对应步长的时间内未检测到以下信息中的 任意一种时,该定时器的值增加:网络设备发送的调度蜂窝链路的下行控制信息DCI时;网络设备发送的调度侧行链路的下行控制信息DCI时;侧行链路的ACK应答信息时;侧行链路的侧行控制信息SCI时。Correspondingly, when the timer is running and the timer does not detect any of the following information within the corresponding step time, the value of the timer increases: downlink control of the scheduled cellular link sent by the network device When DCI information is used; when the downlink control information DCI for scheduling the side link sent by the network device is sent; when the ACK response information of the side link is used; when the side control information SCI of the side link is used.
应说明的是,未检测到该侧行链路的ACK应答消息可以为没有检测到网络设备发送的调度蜂窝链路的下行控制信息DCI、接入网发送的调度侧行链路的下行控制信息DCI时、侧行链路的侧行控制信息SCI中任何一个,侧行链路的发送否定确认(negative acknowledgement,NACK)NACK应答信息,定时器值增加。还可以为终端设备没有检测到ACK应答消息和NACK应答消息,该终端设备向网络设备发送非连续发送(discontinuous transmission,DTX)信息,该定时器值增加。It should be noted that the ACK response message that does not detect the side link may be DCI that does not detect the downlink control information of the scheduled cellular link sent by the network device, or the downlink control information of the scheduled side link sent by the access network During DCI, any one of the side control information SCI of the side link, the side link sends negative acknowledgement (negative acknowledgement, NACK) NACK response information, and the timer value increases. It may also be that the terminal device does not detect the ACK response message and the NACK response message, the terminal device sends discontinuous transmission (DTX) information to the network device, and the timer value increases.
可选地,该NACK信息可以是1个或多个。例如,在单播场下,第一终端设备接收到终端设备的一个NACK信息;可以是在组播或广播场景下第一终端设备接收到多个NACK信息。Optionally, the NACK information may be one or more. For example, in a unicast field, the first terminal device receives one NACK message of the terminal device; it may be that the first terminal device receives multiple NACK messages in a multicast or broadcast scenario.
在本申请实施例中,当终端设备成功接收到上述控制信息时,表明该终端设备和接入网当前的通信发生异常,关于终端设备和网络设备之间有关调度信息的理解不一致,可能处于网络中的某个终端设备掉线或该终端设备与该网络设备工作的BWP不同;或者该终端设备处于网络外。In the embodiment of the present application, when the terminal device successfully receives the above control information, it indicates that the current communication between the terminal device and the access network is abnormal, and the understanding about the scheduling information between the terminal device and the network device is inconsistent and may be in the network One of the terminal devices is offline or the BWP of the terminal device and the network device is different; or the terminal device is outside the network.
应说明,该ACK信息或NACK信息可以是混合自动重传HARQ的ACK或NACK反馈、自动重传ARQ的ACK或NACK反馈等。It should be noted that the ACK information or NACK information may be ACK or NACK feedback of hybrid automatic repeat HARQ, ACK or NACK feedback of automatic repeat ARQ, and so on.
上述技术方案中,可以根据定时器的状态确定是否进行该侧行链路的BWP切换。In the above technical solution, whether to perform BWP switching of the side link can be determined according to the state of the timer.
当该定时器过期时,需要进行侧行链路的BWP切换。其中,该侧行链路的BWP切换可以为终端设备从连接态下的侧行链路第一BWP切换到空闲态下的侧行链路第二BWP2;可以为终端设备从空闲态下的侧行链路第二BWP切换到网络外状态下的侧行链路第三BWP;还可以为终端设备从连接态下的侧行链路第一BWP切换到网络外状态下的侧行链路第三BWP。When this timer expires, the BWP switch of the side link needs to be performed. Wherein, the BWP switching of the side link may be that the terminal device switches from the first BWP of the side link in the connected state to the second BWP2 of the side link in the idle state; it may be the side of the terminal device from the idle state The second BWP of the link is switched to the third BWP of the side link in the out-of-network state; the terminal device may also switch from the first BWP of the side link in the connected state to the side link in the out-of-network state. Three BWP.
其中,当该定时器过期时,处于连接状态下的终端设备向第一终端设备上报该定时器过期的指示信息或终端设备要进行侧行链路的BWP的切换的指示信息。When the timer expires, the terminal device in the connected state reports to the first terminal device indication information that the timer expires or indication information that the terminal device is to switch the BWP of the side link.
可选地,当该定时器过期时,表明该终端设备未接收到相应的调度信令,可能通信已经中断,则该终端设备从当前侧行链路的BWP切换到一个缺省的BWP上重新接入通信系统,实现传输。其中,该缺省的BWP为处于空闲态下的侧行链路的BWP。Optionally, when the timer expires, it indicates that the terminal device has not received the corresponding scheduling signaling, and the communication may have been interrupted, then the terminal device switches from the current side link BWP to a default BWP and restarts Access to the communication system to achieve transmission. The default BWP is the BWP of the side link in the idle state.
另外,如果该第一终端设备一直向终端设备发送数据包,但并没有收到任何信息没有接收(如ACK或NACK信息),则表明该第一终端设备和终端设备之间通信存在问题,需要进行调整,此时,该第一定时器的值增加。In addition, if the first terminal device has been sending data packets to the terminal device, but has not received any information and has not received it (such as ACK or NACK information), it indicates that there is a problem with the communication between the first terminal device and the terminal device, and needs to The adjustment is performed, and at this time, the value of the first timer increases.
以上结合图4至图8,对本申请提出的通信方法进行了详细说明。下文说明本申请提出的通信装置。The communication method proposed in this application has been described in detail above with reference to FIGS. 4 to 8. The communication device proposed in this application will be described below.
参见图9,图9是本申请提供的通信装置10的示意图。如图9所示,通信装置10包括收发单元910以及处理单元920。Referring to FIG. 9, FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of the communication device 10 provided by the present application. As shown in FIG. 9, the communication device 10 includes a transceiver unit 910 and a processing unit 920.
在一些可能的实现方式中,通信装置10可以是方法400对应的第一终端设备。In some possible implementations, the communication apparatus 10 may be the first terminal device corresponding to the method 400.
收发单元910,用于执行第一终端设备获取网络设备发送的至少两种连接状态分别对应的带宽部分BWP的配置信息,该连接状态为终端设备与网络设备之间的连接状态的步 骤S401,该至少两种连接状态包括空闲态、连接态或网络外,该至少两种连接状态分别对应的BWP用于侧行链路。The transceiving unit 910 is configured to execute the first terminal device acquiring configuration information of the bandwidth part BWP corresponding to at least two connection states sent by the network device. The connection state is step S401 of the connection state between the terminal device and the network device. The at least two connection states include an idle state, a connection state, or off-network, and the BWPs corresponding to the at least two connection states are used for side links.
其中,第一BWP和第二BWP属于至少两种连接状态分别对应的BWP。Wherein, the first BWP and the second BWP belong to BWP corresponding to at least two connection states respectively.
其中,装置10中的收发单元910包括接收单元和发送单元,同时具备接收和发送功能。用于执行执行方法实施例中第一终端设备从其它设备获取、接收和发送信息的步骤。可选地,收发单元910还用于执行向网络设备发送第一终端设备支持的BWP切换时延类型的步骤S402。Among them, the transceiver unit 910 in the device 10 includes a receiving unit and a sending unit, and has both receiving and sending functions. It is used to perform the steps of acquiring, receiving, and sending information from other devices by the first terminal device in the method embodiment. Optionally, the transceiving unit 910 is further configured to perform a step S402 of sending the BWP handover delay type supported by the first terminal device to the network device.
不同BWP切换时延类型对应不同的BWP切换时延,为了实现通信的终端设备同时进行BWP切换,应在第一终端设备切换之前,向网络设备发送该第一终端设备支持的BWP切换时延类型,用于确定切换时长。Different BWP handover delay types correspond to different BWP handover delays. In order to achieve simultaneous BWP handover of the terminal device communicating, the BWP handover delay type supported by the first terminal device should be sent to the network device before the first terminal device handover , Used to determine the switching duration.
可选地,收发单元910还用于执行第一终端设备接收网络设备发送的第一切换时长的步骤S404。Optionally, the transceiving unit 910 is further configured to perform step S404 where the first terminal device receives the first handover duration sent by the network device.
该第一切换时长为该第一终端设备支持的BWP切换时延类型对应的切换时延的最大值,以确保互相通信的终端设备可以同时完成BWP切换。其中,该第一终端设备在开始切换后的第一切换时长的时间内不发送数据,直至第一切换时长结束。The first switching duration is the maximum value of the switching delay corresponding to the BWP switching delay type supported by the first terminal device, so as to ensure that terminal devices communicating with each other can complete BWP switching at the same time. Wherein, the first terminal device does not send data within the time of the first handover duration after the start of handover until the end of the first handover duration.
可选地,收发单元910还用于执行第一终端设备获取切换指示信息的步骤S405。其中,切换指示信息用于指示第一终端设备从第一BWP切换到第二BWP。Optionally, the transceiving unit 910 is further configured to perform step S405 where the first terminal device acquires the switching instruction information. The switching instruction information is used to instruct the first terminal device to switch from the first BWP to the second BWP.
可选地,当第一终端设备处于不同连接状态时,获取该切换指示信息的方式不同。Optionally, when the first terminal device is in a different connection state, the manner of acquiring the handover indication information is different.
例如,当第一终端设备处于连接态时,该切换指示信息由该网络设备发送给第一终端设备,第一终端设备从网络设备接收切换指示信息。当第一终端设备处于网络外时,第一终端设备不能接收网络设备发送的信息,处于网络外的第一终端设备从第二终端设备接收切换指示信息。需要理解的是,第二终端设备是某个处于网络内的终端设备,此处仅用于举例。For example, when the first terminal device is in a connected state, the handover instruction information is sent by the network device to the first terminal device, and the first terminal device receives the handover instruction information from the network device. When the first terminal device is outside the network, the first terminal device cannot receive the information sent by the network device, and the first terminal device outside the network receives the switching instruction information from the second terminal device. It should be understood that the second terminal device is a terminal device in the network, which is only used as an example here.
可选地,该切换指示信息还用于指示以下信息中的至少一种:切换开始的时刻;切换完成的时刻,或者进行BWP切换的时长;在第二BWP上的传输资源。Optionally, the handover indication information is also used to indicate at least one of the following information: the time when the handover starts; the time when the handover is completed, or the duration of the BWP handover; and the transmission resource on the second BWP.
该切换指示信息指示第一终端设备根据该指示信息从第一BWP切换至第二BWP。The switching instruction information instructs the first terminal device to switch from the first BWP to the second BWP according to the instruction information.
可选地,收发单元910还用于执行第一终端设备从网络设备接收第一指示信息的步骤S407。Optionally, the transceiving unit 910 is further configured to perform step S407 where the first terminal device receives the first indication information from the network device.
可选地,收发单元910还用于执行第一终端设备向网络设备发送第二指示信息的步骤S408。Optionally, the transceiving unit 910 is further configured to perform step S408 where the first terminal device sends second indication information to the network device.
其中,第一指示信息和第二指示信息是在第一终端设备从第一BWP切换到第二BWP后,用于确定第一终端设备切换成功的指示信息。The first indication information and the second indication information are indication information used to determine that the first terminal device is successfully switched after the first terminal device switches from the first BWP to the second BWP.
可选地,该第一指示信息可以包括以下中的至少一种:第一BWP的指示信息;第二BWP的指示信息;时间间隔信息,其中,该时间间隔信息指示从该侧行链路第一BWP切换至侧行链路第二BWP的切换的开始时刻或完成时刻与该第一指示信息的传输时刻的间隔。Optionally, the first indication information may include at least one of the following: indication information of the first BWP; indication information of the second BWP; and time interval information, wherein the time interval information indicates that the The interval between the start time or completion time of the handover of a BWP to the second BWP of the side link and the transmission time of the first indication information
可选地,该第二指示信息包括以下中的任意一种:该第一BWP的指示信息;该第二BWP的指示信息;该BWP切换成功的指示。Optionally, the second indication information includes any one of the following: indication information of the first BWP; indication information of the second BWP; indication of successful BWP handover.
可选地,在同时激活M个第一终端设备的BWP时,收发单元910还用于向网络设备 发送以下信息:是否支持同时切换该蜂窝链路BWP和该侧行链路BWP;或支持同时切换该蜂窝链路BWP和该侧行链路BWP的总数量;和/或在支持同时切换该换蜂窝链路BWP和该侧行链路BWP条件下,支持该蜂窝链路BWP同时切换数量和支持该侧行链路BWP中同时切换的BWP的数量;或在支持同时切换该换蜂窝链路BWP和该侧行链路BWP条件下,支持同时切换该蜂窝链路BWP的切换时延或切换时延类型和该侧行链路BWP的切换时延或切换时延类型。Optionally, when the BWPs of the M first terminal devices are activated at the same time, the transceiver unit 910 is also used to send the following information to the network device: whether to support switching between the cellular link BWP and the side link BWP simultaneously; or to support simultaneous The total number of handovers of the cellular link BWP and the side link BWP; and/or the number of simultaneous handovers of the cellular link BWP and The number of BWPs supporting simultaneous handover in the BWP of the side link; or the switch delay or handover of simultaneous switching of the BWP of the cellular link under the condition of supporting simultaneous switching of the switching cellular link BWP and the side link BWP The delay type and the switching delay or the switching delay type of the BWP of the side link.
例如,在当前激活的M个BWP同时切换之前,第一终端设备需要先向网络设备上报是否允许同时切换该蜂窝链路BWP和该侧行链路BWP,若不允许,则不进行该M个BWP的同时切换;若允许,则上报支持同时切换该蜂窝链路BWP和该侧行链路BWP的总数量,例如N,N为小于或等于M正整数。同时上报该N个同时切换的BWP中蜂窝链路BWP数量及类型和该侧行链路BWP数量及类型,从而确定第一切换时长,实现N个包括蜂窝链路BWP和侧行链路BWP的同时切换。For example, before the currently activated M BWPs are switched simultaneously, the first terminal device needs to first report to the network device whether to allow simultaneous switching of the cellular link BWP and the side link BWP. If not, the M MWPs are not performed. Simultaneous BWP handover; if allowed, report the total number of BWP and sidelink BWP that support simultaneous handover of the cellular link, for example, N, where N is a positive integer less than or equal to M. The number and type of cellular links BWP and the number and type of the side link BWP in the N simultaneous switched BWPs are reported at the same time, so as to determine the first switching duration and realize the N number including the cellular link BWP and the side link BWP Switch simultaneously.
处理单元920执行方法实施例中第一终端设备内部实现或处理的步骤。例如,处理单元920用于执行第一终端设备根据配置信息中第一BWP的配置信息、第二BWP的配置信息以及切换指示信息从第一BWP切换到第二BWP的步骤S406。The processing unit 920 executes steps internally implemented or processed in the first terminal device in the method embodiment. For example, the processing unit 920 is configured to perform step S406 of switching the first terminal device from the first BWP to the second BWP according to the configuration information of the first BWP, the configuration information of the second BWP, and the switching instruction information in the configuration information.
可选地,该处理单元还用于执行第一终端设备根据配置信息中第一BWP的配置信息、第二BWP的配置信息以及预配置切换条件,从第一BWP切换到第二BWP的步骤。Optionally, the processing unit is further configured to perform a step of the first terminal device switching from the first BWP to the second BWP according to the configuration information of the first BWP, the configuration information of the second BWP, and the pre-configured switching conditions in the configuration information.
其中,该预配置切换条件为该第一终端设备的连接状态的切换与BWP切换的对应关系。Wherein, the pre-configured switching condition is a correspondence between switching of the connection state of the first terminal device and BWP switching.
可选地,该预配置切换条件可以为系统预先配置的,或者是协议中预定义的,还可以是第一终端设备的连接状态的切换时,向网络设备上报信息,网络设备接收到该第一终端设备上报的信息后配置的,本申请实施例对此不作限定。Optionally, the pre-configured switching conditions may be pre-configured by the system, or pre-defined in the protocol, or may be reported to the network device when the connection state of the first terminal device is switched, and the network device receives the first It is configured after the information reported by a terminal device is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
可选的,本申请中第一BWP的配置信息和第二BWP的配置信息可以来自同一个消息,也可以同自于不同的消息,还可以来自同一个消息中的不同的部分。例如,可以是通过同一个SIB或RRC消息或预配置消息发送给终端设备的,可以是通过不同SIB消息或不同的RRC消息或不同的或预配置消息发送给终端设备的,还可以是通过一个SIB消息或一个RRC消息或一个预配置消息中的不同字段或消息体的不同部分发送给终端设备的,本申请对此不作限制。Optionally, the configuration information of the first BWP and the configuration information of the second BWP in this application may come from the same message, or from different messages, or may come from different parts of the same message. For example, it can be sent to the terminal device through the same SIB or RRC message or pre-configured message, it can be sent to the terminal device through different SIB messages or different RRC messages or different or pre-configured messages, or it can be sent through a The SIB message or an RRC message or a pre-configured message in different fields or different parts of the message body are sent to the terminal device, this application does not limit this.
在一些可能的实现方式中,通信装置10可以是方法700对应的第一终端设备。In some possible implementations, the communication apparatus 10 may be the first terminal device corresponding to the method 700.
可选地,收发单元910用于执行第一终端设备接收网络设备发送的第一切换指示信息的步骤S710。Optionally, the transceiving unit 910 is configured to perform step S710 where the first terminal device receives the first handover instruction information sent by the network device.
该第一切换指示信息用于指示当前激活的M个BWP的切换,M为大于1的正整数。The first switching instruction information is used to indicate the currently activated switching of M BWPs, where M is a positive integer greater than 1.
应理解,该当前激活的M个BWP链路类型可以相同也可以不同,比如,可以为M个侧行链路,也可以为M个蜂窝链路,或者为M个侧行链路和蜂窝链路,本申请实施例对此并不作限定。It should be understood that the currently activated M BWP link types may be the same or different, for example, may be M side links, M cellular links, or M side links and cellular links This is not limited in the embodiments of the present application.
可选地,该第一切换指示信息包括SIB、RRC、MAC CE或DCI中的任意一种或多种组合来承载,本申请实施例对此并不做限定。Optionally, the first handover indication information includes any one or more combinations of SIB, RRC, MAC CE or DCI to carry, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
可选地,处理单元920用于执行第一终端设备根据第一切换指示信息进行M个BWP切换的步骤S720。Optionally, the processing unit 920 is configured to perform a step S720 of the first terminal device performing M BWP handovers according to the first handover instruction information.
在一些可能的实现方式中,通信装置10可以是方法800对应的第一终端设备。In some possible implementations, the communication apparatus 10 may be the first terminal device corresponding to the method 800.
可选地,收发单元910用于执行第一终端设备接收网络设备发送的定时器配置信息的步骤S810。Optionally, the transceiving unit 910 is configured to perform step S810 in which the first terminal device receives timer configuration information sent by the network device.
可选地,处理单元920用于执行第一终端设备根据定时器的配置信息,管理定时器的步骤S820。Optionally, the processing unit 920 is configured to execute step S820 in which the first terminal device manages the timer according to the configuration information of the timer.
当该定时器过期,从该侧行链路第一BWP切换到侧行链路第二BWP,该侧行链路第一BWP为当前激活的侧行链路的BWP,该侧行链路第二BWP为空闲态的终端设备的侧行链路的BWP或用于网络外的侧行链路的BWP。When the timer expires, the first BWP of the side link is switched to the second BWP of the side link. The first BWP of the side link is the BWP of the currently activated side link. The second BWP is the BWP of the side link of the terminal device in the idle state or the BWP used for the side link outside the network.
图10是本申请实施例提供的通信装置10的结构示意图。该通信装置10可以是第一终端设备20,执行上述方法实施例中第一终端设备的功能。10 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device 10 provided by an embodiment of the present application. The communication device 10 may be a first terminal device 20, which performs the function of the first terminal device in the above method embodiment.
如图所示,该第一终端设备20包括处理器210和收发器220。可选地,该第一终端设备20还包括存储器230。其中,处理器210、收发器220和存储器230之间可以通过内部连接通路互相通信,传递控制和/或数据信号,该存储器230用于存储计算机程序,该处理器210用于从该存储器230中调用并运行该计算机程序,以控制该收发器220收发信号。可选地,第一终端设备20还可以包括天线240,用于将收发器220输出的上行数据或上行控制信令通过无线信号发送出去。As shown in the figure, the first terminal device 20 includes a processor 210 and a transceiver 220. Optionally, the first terminal device 20 further includes a memory 230. Among them, the processor 210, the transceiver 220 and the memory 230 can communicate with each other through an internal connection path to transfer control and/or data signals. The memory 230 is used to store a computer program, and the processor 210 is used from the memory 230 Call and run the computer program to control the transceiver 220 to send and receive signals. Optionally, the first terminal device 20 may further include an antenna 240 for sending uplink data or uplink control signaling output by the transceiver 220 through a wireless signal.
上述处理器210可以和存储器230可以合成一个处理装置,处理器210用于执行存储器230中存储的程序代码来实现上述功能。具体实现时,该存储器230也可以集成在处理器210中,或者独立于处理器210。该处理器210可以与通信设备10处理单元对应。The above processor 210 and the memory 230 may be combined into one processing device. The processor 210 is used to execute the program code stored in the memory 230 to realize the above function. During specific implementation, the memory 230 may also be integrated in the processor 210 or independent of the processor 210. The processor 210 may correspond to the processing unit of the communication device 10.
上述收发器220可以与图9中的收发单元910对应,也可以称为通信单元。收发器220可以包括接收器(或称接收机、接收电路)和发射器(或称发射机、发射电路)。其中,接收器用于接收信号,发射器用于发射信号。The transceiver 220 described above may correspond to the transceiver unit 910 in FIG. 9 and may also be referred to as a communication unit. The transceiver 220 may include a receiver (or receiver, receiving circuit) and a transmitter (or transmitter, transmitting circuit). Among them, the receiver is used to receive signals, and the transmitter is used to transmit signals.
应理解,图10所示的终端设备20能够实现图4、图7以及图8所示方法实施例中涉及第一终端设备的各个过程。第一终端设备20中的各个模块的操作和/或功能,分别为了实现上述方法实施例中的相应流程。具体可参见上述方法实施例中的描述,为避免重复,此处适当省略详细描述。It should be understood that the terminal device 20 shown in FIG. 10 can implement various processes involving the first terminal device in the method embodiments shown in FIGS. 4, 7, and 8. The operations and/or functions of each module in the first terminal device 20 are respectively for implementing the corresponding processes in the above method embodiments. For details, please refer to the description in the above method embodiments. In order to avoid repetition, the detailed description is appropriately omitted here.
上述处理器210可以用于执行前面方法实施例中描述的由第一终端设备内部实现的动作,而收发器220可以用于执行前面方法实施例中描述的第一终端设备向网络设备发送或从网络设备接收的动作。具体请见前面方法实施例中的描述,此处不再赘述。The above-mentioned processor 210 may be used to perform the actions described in the foregoing method embodiments and implemented internally by the first terminal device, and the transceiver 220 may be used to perform the first terminal device described in the foregoing method embodiment to send to or from the network device Action received by the network device. For details, please refer to the description in the foregoing method embodiment, and no more details are provided here.
可选地,上述第一终端设备20还可以包括电源250,用于给终端设备中的各种器件或电路提供电源。Optionally, the first terminal device 20 may further include a power supply 250, which is used to provide power to various devices or circuits in the terminal device.
除此之外,为了使得第一终端设备的功能更加完善,该第一终端设备20还可以包括输入单元260、显示单元270、音频电路280、摄像头290和传感器2100等中的一个或多个,所述音频电路还可以包括扬声器282、麦克风284等。In addition, in order to make the function of the first terminal device more perfect, the first terminal device 20 may further include one or more of an input unit 260, a display unit 270, an audio circuit 280, a camera 290, a sensor 2100, etc., The audio circuit may further include a speaker 282, a microphone 284, and the like.
需要说明的是,该通信装置10也可以是前述任一方法实施例中的第二终端设备或者第三终端设备,以实现前述任一实现方式中的第二终端设备或者第三终端设备的步骤或者功能。It should be noted that the communication device 10 may also be the second terminal device or the third terminal device in any of the foregoing method embodiments, to implement the steps of the second terminal device or the third terminal device in any of the foregoing implementation manners Or function.
参见图11,图11是本申请提出的通信装置30的示意图。如图11所示,装置30包括处理单元1110以及收发单元1120。Referring to FIG. 11, FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of the communication device 30 proposed by the present application. As shown in FIG. 11, the device 30 includes a processing unit 1110 and a transceiver unit 1120.
在一些可能的实现方式中,通信装置30可以是方法400对应的网络设备。In some possible implementations, the communication device 30 may be a network device corresponding to the method 400.
可选地,收发单元1120,用于执行网络设备向第一终端设备发送至少两种连接状态对应的带宽部分BWP的配置信息的步骤S401。Optionally, the transceiver unit 1120 is configured to perform step S401 in which the network device sends configuration information of the bandwidth part BWP corresponding to at least two connection states to the first terminal device.
其中,该连接状态为终端设备与网络设备之间的连接状态,包括连接态、网络外和空闲态。该至少两种连接状态分别对应的BWP用于侧行链路。Among them, the connection state is the connection state between the terminal device and the network device, including the connection state, out-of-network and idle state. The BWPs corresponding to the at least two connection states are used for the side link.
其中,装置30中的收发单元1120包括接收单元和发送单元,同时具备接收和发送功能。用于执行执行方法实施例中网络设备从其它设备获取、接收和发送信息的步骤。Among them, the transceiver unit 1120 in the device 30 includes a receiving unit and a sending unit, and has both receiving and sending functions. It is used to perform the steps of obtaining, receiving, and sending information from other devices by the network device in the method embodiment.
可选地,收发单元1120用于执行网络设备接收第一终端设备发送第一终端支持的BWP切换时延类型的步骤S402。Optionally, the transceiving unit 1120 is configured to perform a step S402 where the network device receives the BWP handover delay type supported by the first terminal and sent by the first terminal device.
不同BWP切换时延类型对应不同的BWP切换时延,为了实现通信的终端设备同时进行BWP切换,应在第一终端设备切换之前,网络设备接收第一终端设备上报的该第一终端设备支持的BWP切换时延类型,用于确定切换时长。Different BWP handover delay types correspond to different BWP handover delays. In order to achieve simultaneous BWP handover of the communication terminal device, the network device should receive the first terminal device's support of the first terminal device before the first terminal device switches. BWP handover delay type, used to determine the handover duration.
可选地,收发单元1120还用于执行网络设备向第一终端设备发送第一切换时长的步骤S404。Optionally, the transceiver unit 1120 is further configured to perform step S404 where the network device sends the first switching duration to the first terminal device.
该第一切换时长为该第一终端设备支持的BWP切换时延类型对应的切换时延的最大值,以确保互相通信的终端设备可以同时完成BWP切换。其中,该第一终端设备在开始切换后的第一切换时长的时间内不发送数据,直至第一切换时长结束。The first switching duration is the maximum value of the switching delay corresponding to the BWP switching delay type supported by the first terminal device, so as to ensure that terminal devices communicating with each other can complete BWP switching at the same time. Wherein, the first terminal device does not send data within the time of the first handover duration after the start of handover until the end of the first handover duration.
可选定,收发单元1120还用于执行网络设备向第一终端设备发送切换指示信息的步骤S405。其中,切换指示信息用于指示第一终端设备从第一BWP切换到第二BWP。Optionally, the transceiving unit 1120 is further configured to perform step S405 in which the network device sends switching instruction information to the first terminal device. The switching instruction information is used to instruct the first terminal device to switch from the first BWP to the second BWP.
例如,当第一终端设备处于连接态时,该切换指示信息由该网络设备发送给第一终端设备,第一终端设备从网络设备接收切换指示信息。For example, when the first terminal device is in a connected state, the handover instruction information is sent by the network device to the first terminal device, and the first terminal device receives the handover instruction information from the network device.
可选地,该切换指示信息还用于指示以下信息中的至少一种:切换开始的时刻;切换完成的时刻,或者进行BWP切换的时长;在第二BWP上的传输资源。Optionally, the handover indication information is also used to indicate at least one of the following information: the time when the handover starts; the time when the handover is completed, or the duration of the BWP handover; and the transmission resource on the second BWP.
该切换指示信息指示第一终端设备根据该指示信息从第一BWP切换至第二BWP。The switching instruction information instructs the first terminal device to switch from the first BWP to the second BWP according to the instruction information.
可选地,收发单元1120还用于向第一终端设备发送预配置切换条件,该预配置切换条件为该第一终端设备的连接状态的切换与BWP切换的对应关系。Optionally, the transceiving unit 1120 is further configured to send a pre-configured switching condition to the first terminal device, where the pre-configured switching condition is a correspondence between switching of the connection state of the first terminal device and BWP switching.
其中,该预配置切换条件为该第一终端设备的连接状态的切换与BWP切换的对应关系。Wherein, the pre-configured switching condition is a correspondence between switching of the connection state of the first terminal device and BWP switching.
可选地,该预配置切换条件可以为系统预先配置的,或者是协议中预定义的,还可以是第一终端设备的连接状态的切换时,向网络设备上报信息,网络设备接收到该第一终端设备上报的信息后配置的,本申请实施例对此不作限定。Optionally, the pre-configured switching conditions may be pre-configured by the system, or pre-defined in the protocol, or may be reported to the network device when the connection state of the first terminal device is switched, and the network device receives the first It is configured after the information reported by a terminal device is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
可选的,本申请中第一BWP的配置信息和第二BWP的配置信息可以来自同一个消息,也可以同自于不同的消息,还可以来自同一个消息中的不同的部分。例如,可以是通过同一个SIB或RRC消息或预配置消息发送给终端设备的,可以是通过不同SIB消息或不同的RRC消息或不同的或预配置消息发送给终端设备的,还可以是通过一个SIB消息或一个RRC消息或一个预配置消息中的不同字段或消息体的不同部分发送给终端设备的,本申请对此不作限制。Optionally, the configuration information of the first BWP and the configuration information of the second BWP in this application may come from the same message, or from different messages, or may come from different parts of the same message. For example, it can be sent to the terminal device through the same SIB or RRC message or pre-configured message, it can be sent to the terminal device through different SIB messages or different RRC messages or different or pre-configured messages, or it can be sent through a The SIB message or an RRC message or a pre-configured message in different fields or different parts of the message body are sent to the terminal device, this application does not limit this.
可选地,收发单元1120还用于执行网络设备向第一终端设备发送第一指示信息的步骤S407。Optionally, the transceiver unit 1120 is further configured to perform step S407 in which the network device sends the first indication information to the first terminal device.
可选地,收发单元1120还用于执行网络设备接收第一终端设备发送的第二指示信息的步骤S408。Optionally, the transceiving unit 1120 is further configured to perform step S408 where the network device receives the second indication information sent by the first terminal device.
其中,第一指示信息和第二指示信息是在第一终端设备从第一BWP切换到第二BWP后,用于确定第一终端设备切换成功的指示信息。The first indication information and the second indication information are indication information used to determine that the first terminal device is successfully switched after the first terminal device switches from the first BWP to the second BWP.
可选地,该第一指示信息可以包括以下中的至少一种:第一BWP的指示信息;第二BWP的指示信息;时间间隔信息,其中,该时间间隔信息指示从该侧行链路第一BWP切换至侧行链路第二BWP的切换的开始时刻或完成时刻与该第一指示信息的传输时刻的间隔。Optionally, the first indication information may include at least one of the following: indication information of the first BWP; indication information of the second BWP; and time interval information, wherein the time interval information indicates that the The interval between the start time or completion time of the handover of a BWP to the second BWP of the side link and the transmission time of the first indication information
可选地,该第二指示信息包括以下中的任意一种:该第一BWP的指示信息;该第二BWP的指示信息;该BWP切换成功的指示。Optionally, the second indication information includes any one of the following: indication information of the first BWP; indication information of the second BWP; indication of successful BWP handover.
可选地,在同时激活M个第一终端设备的BWP时,收发单元1120还用于接收第一终端设备发送的以下信息:是否支持同时切换该蜂窝链路BWP和该侧行链路BWP;或支持同时切换该蜂窝链路BWP和该侧行链路BWP的总数量;和/或在支持同时切换该换蜂窝链路BWP和该侧行链路BWP条件下,支持该蜂窝链路BWP同时切换数量和支持该侧行链路BWP中同时切换的BWP的数量;或在支持同时切换该换蜂窝链路BWP和该侧行链路BWP条件下,支持同时切换该蜂窝链路BWP的切换时延或切换时延类型和该侧行链路BWP的切换时延或切换时延类型。Optionally, when the BWPs of M first terminal devices are activated at the same time, the transceiver unit 1120 is further configured to receive the following information sent by the first terminal device: whether it is supported to switch the cellular link BWP and the side link BWP at the same time; Or support the total number of simultaneous switching of the cellular link BWP and the side link BWP; and/or support the simultaneous switching of the cellular link BWP and the side link BWP under the condition of supporting simultaneous switching of the switching cellular link BWP and the side link BWP The number of handovers and the number of BWPs supporting simultaneous handover in the BWP of the side link; or when the handover of the cellular link BWP is supported under the condition of supporting simultaneous switching of the switching cellular link BWP and the side link BWP Delay or handover delay type and the handover delay or handover delay type of the side link BWP.
例如,在当前激活的M个BWP同时切换之前,第一终端设备需要先向网络设备上报是否允许同时切换该蜂窝链路BWP和该侧行链路BWP,若不允许,则不进行该M个BWP的同时切换;若允许,则上报支持同时切换该蜂窝链路BWP和该侧行链路BWP的总数量,例如N,N为小于或等于M正整数。同时上报该N个同时切换的BWP中蜂窝链路BWP数量及类型和该侧行链路BWP数量及类型,从而确定第一切换时长,实现N个包括蜂窝链路BWP和侧行链路BWP的同时切换。For example, before the currently activated M BWPs are switched simultaneously, the first terminal device needs to first report to the network device whether to allow simultaneous switching of the cellular link BWP and the side link BWP. If not, the M MWPs are not performed. Simultaneous BWP handover; if allowed, report the total number of BWP and sidelink BWP that support simultaneous handover of the cellular link, for example, N, where N is a positive integer less than or equal to M. The number and type of cellular links BWP and the number and type of the side link BWP in the N simultaneous switched BWPs are reported at the same time, so as to determine the first switching duration and realize the N number including the cellular link BWP and the side link BWP Switch simultaneously.
处理单元1110执行方法实施例中网络设备内部实现或处理的步骤。The processing unit 1110 executes steps internally implemented or processed by the network device in the method embodiment.
可选地,处理单元1110用于确定第一终端设备至少两种连接状态分别对应的带宽部分BWP的配置信息,该连接状态为终端设备与网络设备之间的连接状态,该至少两种连接状态包括空闲态、连接态或网络外,该至少两种连接状态分别对应的BWP用于侧行链路。Optionally, the processing unit 1110 is configured to determine configuration information of the bandwidth part BWP corresponding to at least two connection states of the first terminal device, the connection state being a connection state between the terminal device and the network device, the at least two connection states Including the idle state, the connected state, or outside the network, the BWPs corresponding to the at least two connected states are used for the side link.
可选地,处理单元1110还用于执行网络设备根据接收的该第一终端设备发送的该第一终端设备支持的BWP切换时延类型确定第一切换时长的步骤S403,其中该第一切换时长为一对终端设备或一组终端设备支持的BWP切换时延类型对应的BWP切换时延中的最大值。Optionally, the processing unit 1110 is further configured to perform a step S403 where the network device determines the first switching duration according to the received BWP switching delay type supported by the first terminal device and sent by the first terminal device, where the first switching duration It is the maximum value of the BWP switching delay corresponding to the type of BWP switching delay supported by a pair of terminal devices or a group of terminal devices.
在一些可能的实现方式中,通信装置30可以是方法700对应的网络设备。In some possible implementation manners, the communication apparatus 30 may be a network device corresponding to the method 700.
可选地,该收发单元1120用于执行网络设备向第一终端设备发送第一切换指示信息的步骤S710。Optionally, the transceiving unit 1120 is configured to perform step S710 in which the network device sends first switching instruction information to the first terminal device.
该第一切换指示信息用于指示当前激活的M个BWP的切换,M为大于1的正整数。The first switching instruction information is used to indicate the currently activated switching of M BWPs, where M is a positive integer greater than 1.
应理解,该当前激活的M个BWP链路类型可以相同也可以不同,比如,可以为M个侧行链路,也可以为M个蜂窝链路,或者为M个侧行链路和蜂窝链路,本申请实施例对此并不作限定。It should be understood that the currently activated M BWP link types may be the same or different, for example, may be M side links, M cellular links, or M side links and cellular links This is not limited in the embodiments of the present application.
可选地,该第一切换指示信息包括SIB、RRC、MAC CE或DCI中的任意一种或多种组合来承载,本申请实施例对此并不做限定。Optionally, the first handover indication information includes any one or more combinations of SIB, RRC, MAC CE or DCI to carry, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
可选地,处理单元1110用于执行网络设备确定第一终端设备确定第一切换指示信息的步骤。Optionally, the processing unit 1110 is configured to perform a step in which the network device determines that the first terminal device determines the first handover instruction information.
该第一切换指示信息用于指示当前激活的M个BWP的切换,M为大于1的正整数。The first switching instruction information is used to indicate the currently activated switching of M BWPs, where M is a positive integer greater than 1.
应理解,该当前激活的M个BWP链路类型可以相同也可以不同,比如,可以为M个侧行链路,也可以为M个蜂窝链路,或者为M个侧行链路和蜂窝链路,本申请实施例对此并不作限定。It should be understood that the currently activated M BWP link types may be the same or different, for example, may be M side links, M cellular links, or M side links and cellular links This is not limited in the embodiments of the present application.
可选地,当前激活的M个BWP可以在同一个载波上,也可以在不同载波上,本申请实施例对此不作限定。Optionally, the currently activated M BWPs may be on the same carrier or different carriers, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
在一些可能的实现方式中,通信装置30可以是方法800对应的网络设备。In some possible implementations, the communication device 30 may be a network device corresponding to the method 800.
可选地,该收发单元1120用于执行网络设备向第一终端设备发送定时器的配置信息的步骤S810。Optionally, the transceiver unit 1120 is configured to perform step S810 in which the network device sends the configuration information of the timer to the first terminal device.
参见图12,图12是适用于本申请实施例的网络设备40的结构示意图,可以用于实现上述通信方法中的网络设备的功能。Referring to FIG. 12, FIG. 12 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device 40 applicable to an embodiment of the present application, and may be used to implement the functions of the network device in the above-described communication method.
网络设备40可以包括一个或多个射频单元,如远端射频单元(remote radio unit,RRU)401和一个或多个基带单元(base band unit,BBU)。基带单元也可称为数字单元(digital unit,DU)402。该RRU 401可以称为收发单元,与图11中的收发单元1120对应。可选地,该收发单元401还可以称为收发机、收发电路、或者收发器等,其可以包括至少一个天线4011和射频单元4012。可选地,收发单元1120可以包括接收单元和发送单元,接收单元可以对应于接收器(或称接收机、接收电路),发送单元可以对应于发射器(或称发射机、发射电路)。该RRU 401部分主要用于射频信号的收发以及射频信号与基带信号的转换,例如,用于向第一终端设备发送配置信息。该BBU 402部分主要用于进行基带处理,对基站进行控制等。该RRU 401与BBU 402可以是物理上设置在一起,也可以物理上分离设置的,即分布式基站。The network device 40 may include one or more radio frequency units, such as a remote radio unit (RRU) 401 and one or more baseband units (BBU). The baseband unit may also be referred to as a digital unit (DU) 402. The RRU 401 can be called a transceiver unit, which corresponds to the transceiver unit 1120 in FIG. 11. Optionally, the transceiver unit 401 may also be called a transceiver, a transceiver circuit, or a transceiver, etc., which may include at least one antenna 4011 and a radio frequency unit 4012. Optionally, the transceiving unit 1120 may include a receiving unit and a transmitting unit, the receiving unit may correspond to a receiver (or receiver, receiving circuit), and the transmitting unit may correspond to a transmitter (or transmitter, transmitting circuit). The RRU 401 part is mainly used for the transmission and reception of radio frequency signals and the conversion of radio frequency signals and baseband signals, for example, for sending configuration information to the first terminal device. The BBU 402 is mainly used for baseband processing and control of base stations. The RRU 401 and BBU 402 may be physically set together, or may be physically separated, that is, distributed base stations.
该BBU 402为网络设备的控制中心,也可以称为处理单元,可以与图11中的处理单元1110对应,主要用于完成基带处理功能,如信道编码,复用,调制,扩频等。例如该BBU(处理单元)402可以用于控制网络设备40执行上述方法实施例中关于网络设备的操作流程,例如,确定第一切换时长等。The BBU 402 is the control center of the network device, and may also be called a processing unit, which may correspond to the processing unit 1110 in FIG. 11 and is mainly used to complete baseband processing functions, such as channel coding, multiplexing, modulation, and spread spectrum. For example, the BBU (processing unit) 402 may be used to control the network device 40 to perform the operation flow on the network device in the above method embodiment, for example, to determine the first switching duration.
在一个示例中,该BBU 402可以由一个或多个单板构成,多个单板可以共同支持单一接入制式的无线接入网(如,LTE系统,或5G系统),也可以分别支持不同接入制式的无线接入网。该BBU 402还包括存储器4021和处理器4022。该存储器4021用以存储必要的指令和数据。例如存储器4021存储上述实施例中的码本等。该处理器4022用于控制基站进行必要的动作,例如用于控制网路设备执行上述方法实施例中关于网络设备的操作流程。该存储器4021和处理器4022可以服务于一个或多个单板。也就是说,可以每个单板上单独设置存储器和处理器。也可以是多个单板共用相同的存储器和处理器。此外每个单板上还可以设置有必要的电路。In an example, the BBU 402 may be composed of one or more boards, and multiple boards may jointly support a wireless access network of a single access standard (eg, LTE system, or 5G system), or may support different Access standard wireless access network. The BBU 402 also includes a memory 4021 and a processor 4022. The memory 4021 is used to store necessary instructions and data. For example, the memory 4021 stores the codebook and the like in the above embodiment. The processor 4022 is used to control the base station to perform necessary actions, for example, to control the network device to execute the operation flow on the network device in the above method embodiment. The memory 4021 and the processor 4022 can serve one or more single boards. In other words, the memory and the processor can be set separately on each board. It is also possible that multiple boards share the same memory and processor. In addition, each board can also be provided with necessary circuits.
应理解,图12所示的网络设备40能够实现图4、图7以及图8的方法实施例中涉及的网络设备功能。网络设备40中的各个单元的操作和/或功能,分别为了实现本申请方法 实施例中由网络设备执行的相应流程。为避免重复,此处适当省略详述描述。图12示例的网络设备的结构仅为一种可能的形态,而不应对本申请实施例构成任何限定。本申请并不排除未来可能出现的其他形态的网络设备结构的可能。It should be understood that the network device 40 shown in FIG. 12 can implement the network device functions involved in the method embodiments of FIGS. 4, 7, and 8. The operations and/or functions of each unit in the network device 40 are respectively for implementing the corresponding processes executed by the network device in the method embodiment of the present application. To avoid repetition, detailed description is omitted here as appropriate. The structure of the network device illustrated in FIG. 12 is only one possible form, and should not constitute any limitation to the embodiments of the present application. This application does not exclude the possibility of other forms of network equipment structures that may appear in the future.
本申请实施例还提供一种通信系统,其包括前述的网络设备和一个或多个终端设备。An embodiment of the present application further provides a communication system, which includes the foregoing network device and one or more terminal devices.
本申请还提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,该计算机可读存储介质中存储有指令,当该指令在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行上述如图4、图7及图8所示的方法中第一终端设备执行的各个步骤。The present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium, the computer-readable storage medium has instructions stored therein, and when the instructions run on the computer, the computer executes the method shown in FIG. 4, FIG. 7 and FIG. 8 Steps performed by the first terminal device in
本申请还提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,该计算机可读存储介质中存储有指令,当该指令在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行上述如图4、图7及图8所示的方法中网络设备执行的各个步骤。The present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium, the computer-readable storage medium has instructions stored therein, and when the instructions run on the computer, the computer executes the method shown in FIG. 4, FIG. 7 and FIG. 8 The steps performed by the network device in China.
本申请还提供了一种包含指令的计算机程序产品,当该计算机程序产品在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行如图4、图7及图8所示的方法中第一终端设备执行的各个步骤。The present application also provides a computer program product containing instructions, which, when the computer program product runs on a computer, causes the computer to perform the steps performed by the first terminal device in the methods shown in FIGS. 4, 7, and 8. .
本申请还提供了一种包含指令的计算机程序产品,当该计算机程序产品在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行如图4、图7及图8所示的方法中网络设备执行的各个步骤。The present application also provides a computer program product containing instructions. When the computer program product runs on a computer, the computer is allowed to perform various steps performed by the network device in the methods shown in FIGS. 4, 7, and 8.
本申请还提供一种芯片,包括处理器。该处理器用于读取并运行存储器中存储的计算机程序,以执行本申请提供的通信方法中由第一终端设备执行的相应操作和/或流程。可选地,该芯片还包括存储器,该存储器与该处理器通过电路或电线与存储器连接,处理器用于读取并执行该存储器中的计算机程序。进一步可选地,该芯片还包括通信接口,处理器与该通信接口连接。通信接口用于接收需要处理的数据和/或信息,处理器从该通信接口获取该数据和/或信息,并对该数据和/或信息进行处理。该通信接口可以是输入输出接口。The present application also provides a chip, including a processor. The processor is used to read and run the computer program stored in the memory to perform the corresponding operation and/or process performed by the first terminal device in the communication method provided by the present application. Optionally, the chip further includes a memory, the memory and the processor are connected to the memory through a circuit or a wire, and the processor is used to read and execute the computer program in the memory. Further optionally, the chip further includes a communication interface, and the processor is connected to the communication interface. The communication interface is used to receive data and/or information that needs to be processed, and the processor obtains the data and/or information from the communication interface and processes the data and/or information. The communication interface may be an input-output interface.
本申请还提供一种芯片,包括处理器。该处理器用于调用并运行存储器中存储的计算机程序,以执行本申请提供的通信方法中由网络设备执行的相应操作和/或流程。可选地,该芯片还包括存储器,该存储器与该处理器通过电路或电线与存储器连接,处理器用于读取并执行该存储器中的计算机程序。进一步可选地,该芯片还包括通信接口,处理器与该通信接口连接。通信接口用于接收需要处理的数据和/或信息,处理器从该通信接口获取该数据和/或信息,并对该数据和/或信息进行处理。该通信接口可以是输入输出接口。The present application also provides a chip, including a processor. The processor is used to call and run the computer program stored in the memory to perform the corresponding operation and/or process performed by the network device in the communication method provided by the present application. Optionally, the chip further includes a memory, the memory and the processor are connected to the memory through a circuit or a wire, and the processor is used to read and execute the computer program in the memory. Further optionally, the chip further includes a communication interface, and the processor is connected to the communication interface. The communication interface is used to receive data and/or information that needs to be processed, and the processor obtains the data and/or information from the communication interface and processes the data and/or information. The communication interface may be an input-output interface.
以上各实施例中,处理器可以为中央处理器(central processing unit,CPU)、微处理器、特定应用集成电路(application-specific integrated circuit,ASIC),或一个或多个用于控制本申请技术方案程序执行的集成电路等。例如,处理器可以是数字信号处理器设备、微处理器设备、模数转换器、数模转换器等。处理器可以根据这些设备各自的功能而在这些设备之间分配终端设备或网络设备的控制和信号处理的功能。此外,处理器可以具有操作一个或多个软件程序的功能,软件程序可以存储在存储器中。处理器的该功能可以通过硬件实现,也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。该硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的模块。In the above embodiments, the processor may be a central processing unit (CPU), a microprocessor, an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), or one or more used to control the technology of the present application Integrated circuits for program execution. For example, the processor may be a digital signal processor device, a microprocessor device, an analog-to-digital converter, a digital-to-analog converter, or the like. The processor may allocate the functions of control and signal processing of the terminal device or network device among these devices according to their respective functions. In addition, the processor may have a function of operating one or more software programs, and the software programs may be stored in the memory. This function of the processor can be realized by hardware, or can also be realized by hardware executing corresponding software. The hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the above functions.
存储器可以是只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、可存储静态信息和指令的其它类型的静态存储设备、随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)或可存储信息和指令的其它类型的动态存储设备,也可以是电可擦可编程只读存储器(electrically erasable programmable read-only memory,EEPROM)、只读光盘(compact disc read-only memory, CD-ROM)或其他光盘存储、光碟存储(包括压缩光碟、激光碟、光碟、数字通用光碟、蓝光光碟等)、磁盘存储介质或者其它磁存储设备,或者还可以是能够用于携带或存储具有指令或数据结构形式的期望的程序代码并能够由计算机存取的任何其它介质等。The memory may be read-only memory (ROM), other types of static storage devices that can store static information and instructions, random access memory (random access memory, RAM), or other types of information and instructions that can be stored Dynamic storage devices can also be electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (electrically erasable programmable-read-only memory (EEPROM), read-only compact disc (compact disc read-only memory, CD-ROM) or other optical disc storage, optical disc storage ( (Including compact discs, laser discs, optical discs, digital versatile discs, Blu-ray discs, etc.), magnetic disk storage media, or other magnetic storage devices, or can be used to carry or store desired program code in the form of instructions or data structures and can Any other media accessed by the computer, etc.
可选的,上述实施例中涉及的存储器与存储器可以是物理上相互独立的单元,或者,存储器也可以和处理器集成在一起。Optionally, the memory and the memory involved in the foregoing embodiments may be physically independent units, or the memory may be integrated with the processor.
本申请实施例中,“至少一个”是指一个或者多个,“多个”是指两个或两个以上。“和/或”,描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示单独存在A、同时存在A和B、单独存在B的情况。其中A,B可以是单数或者复数。字符“/”一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。“以下至少一项”及其类似表达,是指的这些项中的任意组合,包括单项或复数项的任意组合。例如,a,b和c中的至少一项可以表示:a,b,c,a-b,a-c,b-c或a-b-c,其中a,b,c可以是单个,也可以是多个。In the embodiments of the present application, "at least one" refers to one or more, and "multiple" refers to two or more. "And/or" describes the association relationship of the associated objects, indicating that there may be three relationships, for example, A and/or B, which may indicate the presence of A alone, A and B, and B alone. A and B can be singular or plural. The character "/" generally indicates that the related object is a "or" relationship. "At least one of the following" and similar expressions refer to any combination of these items, including any combination of single items or plural items. For example, at least one of a, b, and c may represent: a, b, c, a-b, a-c, b-c, or a-b-c, where a, b, and c may be single or multiple.
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到,本文中公开的实施例中描述的各单元及算法步骤,能够以电子硬件、计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。Those of ordinary skill in the art may realize that the units and algorithm steps described in the embodiments disclosed herein can be implemented by a combination of electronic hardware, computer software, and electronic hardware. Whether these functions are executed in hardware or software depends on the specific application of the technical solution and design constraints. Professional technicians can use different methods to implement the described functions for each specific application, but such implementation should not be considered beyond the scope of this application.
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到,为描述的方便和简洁,上述描述的系统、装置和单元的具体工作过程,可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程,在此不再赘述。Those skilled in the art can clearly understand that for the convenience and conciseness of the description, the specific working processes of the above-described systems, devices, and units can refer to the corresponding processes in the foregoing method embodiments, and details are not described herein again.
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中,所揭露的系统、装置和方法,可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的,例如单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式。例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式。In the several embodiments provided in this application, the disclosed system, device, and method may be implemented in other ways. For example, the device embodiments described above are only schematic, for example, the division of units is only a logical function division, and there may be other division manners in actual implementation. For example, multiple units or components may be combined or integrated into another system, or some features may be ignored or not implemented. In addition, the displayed or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical, or other forms.
该作为分离部件说明的单元也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件也可以不是物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本申请技术方案的目的。The unit described as a separate component may not be physically separated, and the component displayed as the unit may not be a physical unit, that is, it may be located in one place, or may be distributed on multiple network units. Part or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the technical solution of the present application.
另外,在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。In addition, each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist alone physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
该功能如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机,服务器,或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例该方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括:U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。If this function is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium. Based on this understanding, the technical solution of the present application essentially or part of the contribution to the existing technology or part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to enable a computer device (which may be a personal computer, server, or network device, etc.) to perform all or part of the steps of the method in various embodiments of the present application. The foregoing storage media include: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (ROM), random access memory (RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk and other media that can store program codes .
以上所述,仅为本申请的具体实施方式,任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内,可轻易想到变化或替换,都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。本申请的保护范围应以该权利要求的保护范围为准。The above are only specific implementations of this application, and any person skilled in the art can easily think of changes or replacements within the technical scope disclosed in this application, which should be covered by the protection scope of this application. The scope of protection of this application shall be subject to the scope of protection of the claims.

Claims (30)

  1. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,包括:A communication method, characterized in that it includes:
    第一终端设备获取至少两种连接状态分别对应的带宽部分BWP的配置信息,所述连接状态为终端设备与网络设备之间的连接状态,所述至少两种连接状态包括空闲态、连接态或网络外,所述至少两种连接状态分别对应的BWP用于侧行链路;The first terminal device obtains the configuration information of the bandwidth part BWP corresponding to at least two connection states respectively. The connection state is a connection state between the terminal device and the network device. The at least two connection states include an idle state, a connection state or Outside the network, the BWPs corresponding to the at least two connection states are used for side links;
    所述第一终端设备根据所述配置信息中第一BWP的配置信息与第二BWP的配置信息,从所述第一BWP切换到所述第二BWP;The first terminal device switches from the first BWP to the second BWP according to the configuration information of the first BWP and the configuration information of the second BWP in the configuration information;
    其中,所述第一BWP和所述第二BWP属于所述至少两种连接状态分别对应的BWP。Wherein, the first BWP and the second BWP belong to BWP corresponding to the at least two connection states respectively.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述至少两种连接状态分别对应的BWP包括:The method according to claim 1, wherein the BWPs corresponding to the at least two connection states respectively include:
    空闲态对应的一个BWP;和/或A BWP corresponding to the idle state; and/or
    网络外对应的至少一个BWP,和/或At least one corresponding BWP outside the network, and/or
    连接态对应的至少一个BWP。At least one BWP corresponding to the connected state.
  3. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述从第一BWP切换到第二BWP之前,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 1 or 2, wherein before the switching from the first BWP to the second BWP, the method further comprises:
    所述第一终端设备从网络设备或第二终端设备接收切换指示信息,其中,所述切换指示信息用于指示所述第一终端设备从所述第一BWP切换到所述第二BWP;The first terminal device receives switching instruction information from a network device or a second terminal device, where the switching instruction information is used to instruct the first terminal device to switch from the first BWP to the second BWP;
    所述从第一BWP切换到第二BWP,包括:The switching from the first BWP to the second BWP includes:
    所述第一终端设备根据所述配置信息中所述第一BWP的配置信息与所述第二BWP的配置信息,以及所述切换指示信息,从所述第一BWP切换到所述第二BWP。The first terminal device switches from the first BWP to the second BWP according to the configuration information of the first BWP and the configuration information of the second BWP in the configuration information, and the switching instruction information .
  4. 根据权利要求3所述的方法,其特征在于,所述切换指示信息还用于指示以下信息中的至少一种:The method according to claim 3, wherein the handover indication information is further used to indicate at least one of the following information:
    切换开始的时刻;The moment when the switch begins;
    切换完成的时刻,或者进行BWP切换的时长;The moment when the switch is completed, or the duration of the BWP switch;
    在所述第二BWP上的传输资源。Transmission resources on the second BWP.
  5. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一终端设备根据所述配置信息中第一BWP的配置信息与第二BWP的配置信息,从所述第一BWP切换到所述第二BWP,包括:The method according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the first terminal device switches from the first BWP to the first BWP according to the configuration information of the first BWP and the configuration information of the second BWP in the configuration information The second BWP, including:
    所述第一终端设备根据所述配置信息中所述第一BWP的配置信息与所述第二BWP的配置信息,以及预配置切换条件从所述第一BWP切换到所述第二BWP;The first terminal device switches from the first BWP to the second BWP according to the configuration information of the first BWP and the configuration information of the second BWP in the configuration information, and pre-configured switching conditions;
    所述预配置切换条件为所述第一终端设备的连接状态的切换与BWP切换的对应关系。The pre-configured switching condition is a correspondence between switching of the connection state of the first terminal device and BWP switching.
  6. 根据权利要求1至5中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述配置信息包括所述至少两种连接状态对应的BWP的时频资源,其中,The method according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein the configuration information includes time-frequency resources of BWP corresponding to the at least two connection states, wherein,
    所述连接态对应的至少一个BWP的时频资源为所述空闲态对应的BWP的时频资源的子集;和/或,The time-frequency resource of at least one BWP corresponding to the connected state is a subset of the time-frequency resource of BWP corresponding to the idle state; and/or,
    所述网络外对应的至少一个BWP的时频资源为所述空闲态对应的BWP的时频资源的子集;和/或,The time-frequency resources of at least one BWP corresponding to the outside of the network are a subset of the time-frequency resources of the BWP corresponding to the idle state; and/or,
    所述连接态对应的至少一个BWP的时频资源为所述网络外对应的至少一个BWP的时频资源的子集;和/或,The time-frequency resource of at least one BWP corresponding to the connection state is a subset of the time-frequency resource of at least one BWP corresponding to the outside of the network; and/or,
    所述空闲态对应的BWP的时频资源为所述网络外对应的至少一个BWP的时频资源的子集。The time-frequency resources of the BWP corresponding to the idle state are a subset of the time-frequency resources of at least one BWP corresponding to the outside of the network.
  7. 根据权利要求1至6中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述从第一BWP切换到第二BWP之前,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein before the switching from the first BWP to the second BWP, the method further comprises:
    所述第一终端设备向所述网络设备发送所述第一终端设备支持的BWP切换时延类型;Sending, by the first terminal device, the BWP switching delay type supported by the first terminal device to the network device;
    其中,所述第一终端设备支持的BWP的不同切换时延类型对应不同的BWP切换时延。Wherein, different types of BWP switching delays supported by the first terminal device correspond to different BWP switching delays.
  8. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,包括:A communication method, characterized in that it includes:
    网络设备确定第一终端设备至少两种连接状态分别对应的带宽部分BWP的配置信息,所述连接状态为终端设备与网络设备之间的连接状态,所述至少两种连接状态包括空闲态、连接态或网络外,所述至少两种连接状态分别对应的BWP用于侧行链路;The network device determines the configuration information of the bandwidth part BWP corresponding to at least two connection states of the first terminal device. The connection state is a connection state between the terminal device and the network device. The at least two connection states include an idle state and a connection In the state or outside the network, the BWPs corresponding to the at least two connection states are used for the side link;
    所述网络设备向所述第一终端设备发送所述配置信息。The network device sends the configuration information to the first terminal device.
  9. 根据权利要求8所述的方法,其特征在于,所述至少两种连接状态分别对应的BWP包括:The method according to claim 8, wherein the BWPs corresponding to the at least two connection states respectively include:
    空闲态对应的一个BWP;和/或A BWP corresponding to the idle state; and/or
    网络外对应的至少一个BWP,和/或At least one corresponding BWP outside the network, and/or
    连接态对应的至少一个BWP。At least one BWP corresponding to the connected state.
  10. 根据权利要求8或9所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 8 or 9, wherein the method further comprises:
    当所述第一终端设备处于连接态时,所述网络设备向所述第一终端设备发送切换指示信息,其中,所述切换指示信息用于指示所述第一终端设备从第一BWP切换到第二BWP。When the first terminal device is in the connected state, the network device sends switching instruction information to the first terminal device, where the switching instruction information is used to instruct the first terminal device to switch from the first BWP to Second BWP.
  11. 根据权利要求10所述的方法,其特征在于,所述切换指示信息还用于指示以下信息中的至少一种:The method according to claim 10, wherein the handover indication information is further used to indicate at least one of the following information:
    切换开始的时刻;The moment when the switch begins;
    切换完成的时刻,或者进行BWP切换的时长;The moment when the switch is completed, or the duration of the BWP switch;
    在所述第二BWP上的传输资源。Transmission resources on the second BWP.
  12. 根据权利要求8或9所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 8 or 9, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述网络设备向所述第一终端设备发送预配置切换条件,所述预配置切换条件为所述第一终端设备的连接状态的切换与BWP切换的对应关系。The network device sends a pre-configured switching condition to the first terminal device, where the pre-configured switching condition is a correspondence between switching of the connection state of the first terminal device and BWP switching.
  13. 根据权利要求8至12中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述配置信息包括所述至少两种连接状态对应的BWP的时频资源,其中,The method according to any one of claims 8 to 12, wherein the configuration information includes time-frequency resources of BWP corresponding to the at least two connection states, wherein,
    所述连接态对应的至少一个BWP的时频资源为所述空闲态对应的BWP的时频资源的子集;和/或,The time-frequency resource of at least one BWP corresponding to the connected state is a subset of the time-frequency resource of BWP corresponding to the idle state; and/or,
    所述网络外对应的至少一个BWP的时频资源为所述空闲态对应的BWP的时频资源的子集;和/或,The time-frequency resources of at least one BWP corresponding to the outside of the network are a subset of the time-frequency resources of the BWP corresponding to the idle state; and/or,
    所述连接态对应的至少一个BWP的时频资源为所述网络外对应的至少一个BWP的时频资源的子集;和/或,The time-frequency resource of at least one BWP corresponding to the connection state is a subset of the time-frequency resource of at least one BWP corresponding to the outside of the network; and/or,
    所述空闲态对应的BWP的时频资源为所述网络外对应的至少一个BWP的时频资源的子集。The time-frequency resources of the BWP corresponding to the idle state are a subset of the time-frequency resources of at least one BWP corresponding to the outside of the network.
  14. 根据权利要求8至13中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 8 to 13, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述网络设备接收所述第一终端设备发送的所述第一终端设备支持的BWP切换时延类型;The network device receives the BWP handover delay type supported by the first terminal device and sent by the first terminal device;
    其中,所述第一终端设备支持的BWP的不同切换时延类型对应不同的BWP切换时延。Wherein, different types of BWP switching delays supported by the first terminal device correspond to different BWP switching delays.
  15. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:A communication device, characterized in that it includes:
    收发单元,用于获取至少两种连接状态分别对应的带宽部分BWP的配置信息,所述连接状态为终端设备与网络设备之间的连接状态,所述至少两种连接状态包括空闲态、连接态或网络外,所述至少两种连接状态分别对应的BWP用于侧行链路;The transceiver unit is used to obtain the configuration information of the bandwidth part BWP corresponding to at least two connection states respectively. The connection state is the connection state between the terminal device and the network device. The at least two connection states include an idle state and a connected state Or outside the network, the BWPs corresponding to the at least two connection states are used for side links;
    处理单元,用于根据所述配置信息中第一BWP的配置信息与第二BWP的配置信息,从所述第一BWP切换到所述第二BWP;The processing unit is configured to switch from the first BWP to the second BWP according to the configuration information of the first BWP and the configuration information of the second BWP in the configuration information;
    其中,所述第一BWP和所述第二BWP属于所述至少两种连接状态分别对应的BWP。Wherein, the first BWP and the second BWP belong to BWP corresponding to the at least two connection states respectively.
  16. 根据权利要求15所述的装置,其特征在于,所述至少两种连接状态分别对应的BWP包括:The device according to claim 15, wherein the BWPs corresponding to the at least two connection states respectively include:
    空闲态对应的一个BWP;和/或A BWP corresponding to the idle state; and/or
    网络外对应的至少一个BWP,和/或At least one corresponding BWP outside the network, and/or
    连接态对应的至少一个BWP。At least one BWP corresponding to the connected state.
  17. 根据权利要求15或16所述的装置,其特征在于,所述收发单元还用于:The apparatus according to claim 15 or 16, wherein the transceiver unit is further used to:
    从网络设备或第二终端设备接收切换指示信息,其中,所述切换指示信息用于指示所述第一终端设备从所述第一BWP切换到所述第二BWP;Receiving handover instruction information from a network device or a second terminal device, where the handover instruction information is used to instruct the first terminal device to switch from the first BWP to the second BWP;
    所述处理单元还用于根据所述配置信息中所述第一BWP的配置信息与所述第二BWP的配置信息,以及所述切换指示信息,从所述第一BWP切换到所述第二BWP。The processing unit is further configured to switch from the first BWP to the second according to the configuration information of the first BWP and the configuration information of the second BWP in the configuration information, and the switching instruction information BWP.
  18. 根据权利要求17所述的装置,其特征在于,所述切换指示信息还用于指示以下信息中的至少一种:The apparatus according to claim 17, wherein the switching instruction information is further used to indicate at least one of the following information:
    切换开始的时刻;The moment when the switch begins;
    切换完成的时刻,或者进行BWP切换的时长;The moment when the switch is completed, or the duration of the BWP switch;
    在所述第二BWP上的传输资源。Transmission resources on the second BWP.
  19. 根据权利要求15或16所述的装置,其特征在于,所述处理单元还用于:The apparatus according to claim 15 or 16, wherein the processing unit is further configured to:
    根据所述配置信息中所述第一BWP的配置信息与所述第二BWP的配置信息,以及预配置切换条件从所述第一BWP切换到所述第二BWP;Switching from the first BWP to the second BWP according to the configuration information of the first BWP and the configuration information of the second BWP in the configuration information, and pre-configured switching conditions;
    所述预配置切换条件为所述第一终端设备的连接状态的切换与BWP切换的对应关系。The pre-configured switching condition is a correspondence between switching of the connection state of the first terminal device and BWP switching.
  20. 根据权利要求15至19中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述配置信息包括所述至少两种连接状态对应的BWP的时频资源,其中,The apparatus according to any one of claims 15 to 19, wherein the configuration information includes time-frequency resources of BWP corresponding to the at least two connection states, wherein,
    所述连接态对应的至少一个BWP的时频资源为所述空闲态对应的BWP的时频资源的子集;和/或,The time-frequency resource of at least one BWP corresponding to the connected state is a subset of the time-frequency resource of BWP corresponding to the idle state; and/or,
    所述网络外对应的至少一个BWP的时频资源为所述空闲态对应的BWP的时频资源 的子集;和/或,The time-frequency resources of at least one BWP corresponding to the outside of the network are a subset of the time-frequency resources of the BWP corresponding to the idle state; and/or,
    所述连接态对应的至少一个BWP的时频资源为所述网络外对应的至少一个BWP的时频资源的子集;和/或,The time-frequency resource of at least one BWP corresponding to the connection state is a subset of the time-frequency resource of at least one BWP corresponding to the outside of the network; and/or,
    所述空闲态对应的BWP的时频资源为所述网络外对应的至少一个BWP的时频资源的子集。The time-frequency resources of the BWP corresponding to the idle state are a subset of the time-frequency resources of at least one BWP corresponding to the outside of the network.
  21. 根据权利要求15至20中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述收发单元还用于:The device according to any one of claims 15 to 20, wherein the transceiver unit is further used to:
    向所述网络设备发送所述第一终端设备支持的BWP切换时延类型;Sending the BWP switching delay type supported by the first terminal device to the network device;
    其中,所述第一终端设备支持的BWP的不同切换时延类型对应不同的BWP切换时延。Wherein, different types of BWP switching delays supported by the first terminal device correspond to different BWP switching delays.
  22. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:A communication device, characterized in that it includes:
    处理单元,用于确定第一终端设备至少两种连接状态分别对应的带宽部分BWP的配置信息,所述连接状态为终端设备与网络设备之间的连接状态,所述至少两种连接状态包括空闲态、连接态或网络外,所述至少两种连接状态分别对应的BWP用于侧行链路;The processing unit is configured to determine configuration information of the bandwidth part BWP corresponding to at least two connection states of the first terminal device, the connection state is a connection state between the terminal device and the network device, and the at least two connection states include idle State, connection state or outside the network, the BWPs corresponding to the at least two connection states are used for the side link;
    收发单元,用于向所述第一终端设备发送所述配置信息。The transceiver unit is configured to send the configuration information to the first terminal device.
  23. 根据权利要求22所述的装置,其特征在于,所述至少两种连接状态分别对应的BWP包括:The device according to claim 22, wherein the BWPs corresponding to the at least two connection states respectively include:
    空闲态对应的一个BWP;和/或A BWP corresponding to the idle state; and/or
    网络外对应的至少一个BWP,和/或At least one corresponding BWP outside the network, and/or
    连接态对应的至少一个BWP。At least one BWP corresponding to the connected state.
  24. 根据权利要求22或23所述的装置,其特征在于,当所述第一终端设备处于连接态时,所述收发单元还用于:The apparatus according to claim 22 or 23, wherein when the first terminal device is in a connected state, the transceiver unit is further configured to:
    向所述第一终端设备发送切换指示信息,其中,所述切换指示信息用于指示所述第一终端设备从第一BWP切换到第二BWP。Sending handover instruction information to the first terminal device, where the handover instruction information is used to instruct the first terminal device to switch from the first BWP to the second BWP.
  25. 根据权利要求24所述的装置,其特征在于,所述切换指示信息还用于指示以下信息中的至少一种:The device according to claim 24, wherein the switching instruction information is further used to indicate at least one of the following information:
    切换开始的时刻;The moment when the switch begins;
    切换完成的时刻,或者进行BWP切换的时长;The moment when the switch is completed, or the duration of the BWP switch;
    在所述第二BWP上的传输资源。Transmission resources on the second BWP.
  26. 根据权利要求22或23所述的装置,其特征在于,所述收发单元还用于:The apparatus according to claim 22 or 23, wherein the transceiver unit is further used to:
    向所述第一终端设备发送预配置切换条件,所述预配置切换条件为所述第一终端设备的连接状态的切换与BWP切换的对应关系。Sending a pre-configured switching condition to the first terminal device, where the pre-configured switching condition is a correspondence between switching of the connection state of the first terminal device and BWP switching.
  27. 根据权利要求22至26中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述配置信息包括所述至少两种连接状态对应的BWP的时频资源,其中,The apparatus according to any one of claims 22 to 26, wherein the configuration information includes time-frequency resources of BWP corresponding to the at least two connection states, wherein,
    所述连接态对应的至少一个BWP的时频资源为所述空闲态对应的BWP的时频资源的子集;和/或,The time-frequency resource of at least one BWP corresponding to the connected state is a subset of the time-frequency resource of BWP corresponding to the idle state; and/or,
    所述网络外对应的至少一个BWP的时频资源为所述空闲态对应的BWP的时频资源的子集;和/或,The time-frequency resources of at least one BWP corresponding to the outside of the network are a subset of the time-frequency resources of the BWP corresponding to the idle state; and/or,
    所述连接态对应的至少一个BWP的时频资源为所述网络外对应的至少一个BWP的时频资源的子集;和/或,The time-frequency resource of at least one BWP corresponding to the connection state is a subset of the time-frequency resource of at least one BWP corresponding to the outside of the network; and/or,
    所述空闲态对应的BWP的时频资源为所述网络外对应的至少一个BWP的时频资源的子集。The time-frequency resources of the BWP corresponding to the idle state are a subset of the time-frequency resources of at least one BWP corresponding to the outside of the network.
  28. 根据权利要求22至27中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述收发单元还用于:The device according to any one of claims 22 to 27, wherein the transceiver unit is further used to:
    接收所述第一终端设备发送的所述第一终端设备支持的BWP切换时延类型;Receiving the BWP switching delay type supported by the first terminal device and sent by the first terminal device;
    其中,所述第一终端设备支持的BWP的不同切换时延类型对应不同的BWP切换时延。Wherein, different types of BWP switching delays supported by the first terminal device correspond to different BWP switching delays.
  29. 一种通信设备,其特征在于,包括:A communication device, characterized in that it includes:
    存储器,用于存储计算机程序;Memory, used to store computer programs;
    处理器,用于执行所述存储器中存储的计算机程序,以使得所述设备执行如权利要求1至14中任一项所述的通信方法。A processor, configured to execute a computer program stored in the memory, so that the device executes the communication method according to any one of claims 1 to 14.
  30. 一种计算机可读存储介质,包括计算机程序,当其在计算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行如权利要求1至14中任一项所述的通信方法。A computer-readable storage medium including a computer program which, when run on a computer, causes the computer to execute the communication method according to any one of claims 1 to 14.
PCT/CN2020/071273 2019-01-11 2020-01-10 Communication method and communication apparatus WO2020143730A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201910028787.5 2019-01-11
CN201910028787.5A CN111436082B (en) 2019-01-11 2019-01-11 Communication method and communication device

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2020143730A1 true WO2020143730A1 (en) 2020-07-16

Family

ID=71521787

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2020/071273 WO2020143730A1 (en) 2019-01-11 2020-01-10 Communication method and communication apparatus

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN111436082B (en)
WO (1) WO2020143730A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2023174141A1 (en) * 2022-03-16 2023-09-21 华为技术有限公司 Communication method and apparatus

Families Citing this family (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2022021024A1 (en) * 2020-07-27 2022-02-03 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 Bwp switching method and apparatus, and terminal device
CN114071746A (en) * 2020-08-07 2022-02-18 华为技术有限公司 Communication method and device
EP4221320A4 (en) * 2020-10-12 2023-11-22 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Bandwidth part switching method and apparatus
CN113196824B (en) * 2021-03-17 2023-01-17 北京小米移动软件有限公司 Bandwidth part allocation method, bandwidth part allocation device and storage medium
WO2022198389A1 (en) * 2021-03-22 2022-09-29 北京小米移动软件有限公司 Sidelink configuration method and apparatus, communication device, and storage medium

Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2018031664A1 (en) * 2016-08-10 2018-02-15 Idac Holdings, Inc. Methods for flexible resource usage
WO2018086600A1 (en) * 2016-11-11 2018-05-17 Chou Chie Ming Data packet delivery in rrc inactive state

Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2018031664A1 (en) * 2016-08-10 2018-02-15 Idac Holdings, Inc. Methods for flexible resource usage
WO2018086600A1 (en) * 2016-11-11 2018-05-17 Chou Chie Ming Data packet delivery in rrc inactive state

Non-Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
HUAWEI ET AL.: "BWP Operation for V2X Sidelink", 3GPP TSG RAN WG1 MEETING #96BIS R1-1904690, 12 April 2019 (2019-04-12), XP051707283, DOI: 20200331094432PX *
INTEL CORPORATION: "Alternative Implementation of the 6-1 BWP UE Feature Requirement", 3GPP TSG RAN WG2 MEETING #AH R2- 1810408, 6 July 2018 (2018-07-06), XP051467576, DOI: 20200331094515Y *
ZTE: "Initial Consideration on NR V2X Resource Allocation", 3GPP TSG-RAN WG2#103BIS R2-1814168, 12 October 2018 (2018-10-12), XP051523625, DOI: 20200331094549Y *

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2023174141A1 (en) * 2022-03-16 2023-09-21 华为技术有限公司 Communication method and apparatus

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN111436082B (en) 2023-04-07
CN111436082A (en) 2020-07-21

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US20210168814A1 (en) Method and apparatus for resource configuration for sidelink in internet of vehicles
WO2020143730A1 (en) Communication method and communication apparatus
EP3614777B1 (en) Method and device for transmitting data
US11695515B2 (en) Data transmission method, user equipment, and base station
CA2960215C (en) Medium access control in lte-u
CN111165060B (en) Random access method, device and communication system
US20190182850A1 (en) Inter-Radio Access Technology Carrier Aggregation
TW201429292A (en) Method of managing timing alignment functionality for multiple component carriers
EP3335521A1 (en) Reducing collisions between communication and discovery resources
CN110784928A (en) Transmission timing information sending method, receiving method and device
WO2021217351A1 (en) Channel monitoring method, electronic device, and storage medium
CN112997433B (en) Method for HARQ transmission and communication device
WO2022194151A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
US10999800B2 (en) Method and device for discontinuous reception
US20170196030A1 (en) Coexistence Apparatus, Method, and System for Discovery Signal and Cellular Signal
WO2021119988A1 (en) Discontinuous reception method, electronic device and storage medium
EP4106358A1 (en) Wireless communication method and communication apparatus
WO2020029295A1 (en) Uplink data transmission method, and method and device used to configure uplink data transmission
EP4369797A1 (en) Drx configuration method and apparatus, terminal device, and network device
CN113382379B (en) Wireless communication method and communication device
EP4195542A1 (en) Information transmission method and apparatus, and device and storage medium
WO2022151266A1 (en) Method and apparatus for determining applicable time of media access control (mac) signaling

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 20739118

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 20739118

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1